Hfss user guide

1-1
ANSYS, Inc. Proprietary
© 2009 ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved.
February 23, 2009
Inventory #0025931-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Ansoft HFSS – User Guide

Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
Training ManualTraining Manual
1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Inventory Number: 002704
3rd Edition
HFSS Release: 11.1
Published Date: February 20, 2009
Registered Trademarks:
ANSYS® is a registered trademark of SAS IP Inc.
All other product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective manufacturers.
Disclaimer Notice:
This document has been reviewed and approved in accordance with the ANSYS, Inc.
Documentation Review and Approval Procedures. “This ANSYS Inc. software product (the
Program) and program documentation (Documentation) are furnished by ANSYS, Inc. under an
ANSYS Software License Agreement that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying,
length and nature of use, warranties, disclaimers and remedies, and other provisions. The
Program and Documentation may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that
License Agreement.”
Copyright © 2008 SAS IP, Inc.
Proprietary data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.
All Rights Reserved.
Training Manual
Ansoft HFSS for SI – User Guide

Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Table of Contents
1. Introduction 1-1
– Table of Contents 1-3
– Welcome to Ansoft HFSS 1-4
– Getting Help 1-7
– Ansoft Desktop 1-9
– Simulation Overview 1-18
2. Simulation Basics 2-1
3. Boundary Conditions 3-1
4. Appendix – Boundary Conditions 4-1
5. Examples – Antenna
– UHF Probe 5.1
– Conical Horn 5.2
– Probe Fed Patch 5.3
– Slot Coupled Patch 5.4
– Endfire Waveguide Array 5.5
6. Examples – Microwave
– Magic T 6.1
– Coax Connector 6.2
– 180° Ring Hybrid 6.3
– Coax Stub 6.4
– Microstrip – Wave Port 6.5
– Ferrite Circulator 6.6
7. Examples – Filters
– Bandpass Filter 7.1
8. Examples – Signal Integrity
– LVDS Differential Pair 8.1
– Segmented Return Path 8.2
– Non-ideal Planes 8.3
– Return Path 8.4
9. Examples – On-Chip
– Spiral Inductor 9.1

Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Welcome to Ansoft HFSS
• What is HFSS?
– HFSS is a high-performance full-wave electromagnetic(EM) field simulator for arbitrary 3D volumetric passive device
modeling that takes advantage of the familiar Microsoft Windows graphical user interface. It integrates simulation,
visualization, solid modeling, and automation in an easy-to-learn environment where solutions to your 3D EM problems
are quickly and accurately obtained. Ansoft HFSS employs the Finite Element Method(FEM), adaptive meshing, and
brilliant graphics to give you unparalleled performance and insight to all of your 3D EM problems. Ansoft HFSS can be
used to calculate parameters such as S-Parameters, Resonant Frequency, and Fields. Typical uses include:
• Package Modeling – BGA, QFP, Flip-Chip
• PCB Board Modeling – Power/Ground planes, Mesh Grid Grounds, Backplanes
• Silicon/GaAs - Spiral Inductors, Transformers
• EMC/EMI – Shield Enclosures, Coupling, Near- or Far-Field Radiation
• Antennas/Mobile Communications – Patches, Dipoles, Horns, Conformal Cell Phone Antennas, Quadrafilar Helix, Specific
Absorption Rate(SAR), Infinite Arrays, Radar Cross Section(RCS), Frequency Selective Surfaces(FSS)
• Connectors – Coax, SFP/XFP, Backplane, Transitions
• Waveguide – Filters, Resonators, Transitions, Couplers
• Filters – Cavity Filters, Microstrip, Dielectric
– HFSS is an interactive simulation system whose basic mesh element is a tetrahedron. This allows you to solve any
arbitrary 3D geometry, especially those with complex curves and shapes, in a fraction of the time it would take using
other techniques.
– The name HFSS stands for High Frequency Structure Simulator. Ansoft pioneered the use of the Finite Element
Method(FEM) for EM simulation by developing/implementing technologies such as tangential vector finite elements,
adaptive meshing, and Adaptive Lanczos-Pade Sweep(ALPS). Today, HFSS continues to lead the industry with
innovations such as Modes-to-Nodes and Full-Wave Spice™.
– Ansoft HFSS has evolved over a period of years with input from many users and industries. In industry, Ansoft HFSS
is the tool of choice for high-productivity research, development, and virtual prototyping.

Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Installing the Ansoft HFSS software
• System Requirements
– For up-to-date information, refer to the HFSS Installation Guide
• Installing the Ansoft HFSS Software
– For up-to-date information, refer to the HFSS Installation Guide
• Starting Ansoft HFSS
1. Click the Microsoft Start button, select Programs, and select the Ansoft, HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11.
2. Or Double click on the HFSS 11 icon on the Windows Desktop
NOTE: You should make backup copies of all HFSS projects createNOTE: You should make backup copies of all HFSS projects createNOTE: You should make backup copies of all HFSS projects createNOTE: You should make backup copies of all HFSS projects created with ad with ad with ad with a
previous version of the software before opening them in HFSS v11previous version of the software before opening them in HFSS v11previous version of the software before opening them in HFSS v11previous version of the software before opening them in HFSS v11

Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Web Update
• WebUpdate
– This feature allows you to update any existing Ansoft software from the WebUpdate window. This feature automatically
scans your system to find any Ansoft software, and then allows you to download any updates if they are available.

Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Help
• Getting Help
– If you have any questions while you are using Ansoft HFSS you can find answers in several ways:
• Ansoft HFSS Online Help provides assistance while you are working.
– To get help about a specific, active dialog box, click the Help button in the dialog box or press the F1 key.
– Select the menu item Help > Contents to access the online help system.
– Tooltips are available to provide information about tools on the toolbars or dialog boxes. When you hold the
pointer over a tool for a brief time, a tooltip appears to display the name of the tool.
– As you move the pointer over a tool or click a menu item, the Status Bar at the bottom of the Ansoft HFSS
window provides a brief description of the function of the tool or menu item.
– The Ansoft HFSS Getting Started guide provides detailed information about using HFSS to create and solve
3D EM projects.
• Ansoft Technical Support
– To contact Ansoft technical support staff in your geographical area, please log on to the Ansoft corporate
website, www.ansoft.com and select Contact.
• Your Ansoft sales engineer may also be contacted in order to obtain this information.
• Visiting the Ansoft Web Site
– If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can visit the Ansoft Web site to learn more about the Ansoft company
and products.
• From the Ansoft Desktop
– Select the menu item Help > Ansoft Corporate Website to access the Online Technical Support (OTS)
system.
• From your Internet browser
– Visit www.ansoft.com

Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Help
• For Technical Support
– The following link will direct you to the Ansoft Support Page. The Ansoft Support Pages provide additional
documentation, training, and application notes.
• Web Site: http://www.ansoft.com/support.cfm
• Technical Support:
– 9-4 EST:
• Pittsburgh, PA
• (412) 261-3200 x0 – Ask for Technical Support
• Burlington, MA
– 9-4 PST:
• San Jose, CA
• Portland, OR
• (503) 906-7944
• Irvine, CA
• (714) 417-9311 x6

Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft Desktop Terms
• Ansoft Desktop Terms
– The Ansoft HFSS Desktop has several optional panels:
• A Project Manager which contains a design tree which lists the structure of the project.
• A Message Manager that allows you to view any errors or warnings that occur before you begin a simulation.
• A Property Window that displays and allows you to change model parameters or attributes.
• A Progress Window that displays solution progress.
• A 3D Modeler Window which contains the model and model tree for the active design.

Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft HFSS Desktop
MenuMenuMenuMenu
barbarbarbar
ProgressProgressProgressProgress
WindowWindowWindowWindow
Property WindowProperty WindowProperty WindowProperty Window
MessageMessageMessageMessage
ManagerManagerManagerManager
ProjectProjectProjectProject
with projectwith projectwith projectwith project
treetreetreetree
StatusStatusStatusStatus
barbarbarbar
3D Modeler3D Modeler3D Modeler3D Modeler
ToolbarsToolbarsToolbarsToolbars
Coordinate Entry FieldsCoordinate Entry FieldsCoordinate Entry FieldsCoordinate Entry Fields

Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Project Manager
DesignDesignDesignDesign
Design ResultsDesign ResultsDesign ResultsDesign Results
Design SetupDesign SetupDesign SetupDesign Setup
Design AutomationDesign AutomationDesign AutomationDesign Automation
•ParametricParametricParametricParametric
•OptimizationOptimizationOptimizationOptimization
•SensitivitySensitivitySensitivitySensitivity
•StatisticalStatisticalStatisticalStatistical
Project Manager WindowProject Manager WindowProject Manager WindowProject Manager Window

Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Property Window
Property WindowProperty WindowProperty WindowProperty Window
Property tabsProperty tabsProperty tabsProperty tabs
PropertyPropertyPropertyProperty
buttonsbuttonsbuttonsbuttons
tabletabletabletable

Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Ansoft 3D Modeler
EdgeEdgeEdgeEdge
VertexVertexVertexVertex
PlanePlanePlanePlane
Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)
OriginOriginOriginOrigin
FaceFaceFaceFace
ModelModelModelModel
3D Modeler Window3D Modeler Window3D Modeler Window3D Modeler Window
GraphicsGraphicsGraphicsGraphics
areaareaareaarea
design treedesign treedesign treedesign tree
Context menuContext menuContext menuContext menu

Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• 3D Modeler Design Tree
Grouped by MaterialGrouped by MaterialGrouped by MaterialGrouped by Material
Object ViewObject ViewObject ViewObject View
MaterialMaterialMaterialMaterial
ObjectObjectObjectObject
Object CommandObject CommandObject CommandObject Command
HistoryHistoryHistoryHistory

Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Windows
• Design Windows
– In the Ansoft HFSS Desktop, each project can have multiple designs and each design is displayed in a separate
window.
– You can have multiple projects and design windows open at the same time. Also, you can have multiple views of the
same design visible at the same time.
– To arrange the windows, you can drag them by the title bar, and resize them by dragging a corner or border. Also, you
can select one of the following menu options: Window >Cascade, Window >Tile Vertically, or Window > Tile
Horizontally.
– To organize your Ansoft HFSS window, you can iconize open designs. Click the Iconize ** symbol in the upper right
corner of the document border. An icon appears in the lower part of the Ansoft HFSS window. If the icon is not visible,
it may be behind another open document. Resize any open documents as necessary. Select the menu item Window
> Arrange Icons to arrange them at the bottom of the Ansoft HFSS window.
– Select the menu item Window > Close All to close all open design. You are prompted to Save unsaved designs.
Design iconsDesign iconsDesign iconsDesign icons
IconizeIconizeIconizeIconize
SymbolSymbolSymbolSymbol

Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Toolbars
• Toolbars
– The toolbar buttons are shortcuts for frequently used commands. Most of the available toolbars are displayed in this
illustration of the Ansoft HFSS initial screen, but your Ansoft HFSS window probably will not be arranged this way. You
can customize your toolbar display in a way that is convenient for you.
– Some toolbars are always displayed; other toolbars display automatically when you select a document of the related
type. For example, when you select a 2D report from the project tree, the 2D report toolbar displays.
• To display or hide individual toolbars:
– Right-click the Ansoft HFSS window frame.
• A list of all the toolbars is displayed. The toolbars with a check mark beside them are visible; the toolbars without
a check mark are hidden. Click the toolbar name to turn its display on or off
– To make changes to the toolbars, select the menu item Tools > Customize. See Customize and Arrange Toolbars
on the next page.

Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Toolbars
• Customize and Arrange Toolbars
– To customize toolbars:
• Select the menu item Tools > Customize, or right-click the Ansoft HFSS window frame and click Customize at
the bottom of the toolbar list.
• In the Customize dialog, you can do the following:
– View a Description of the toolbar commands
1.Select an item from the Component pull-down list
2.Select an item from the Category list
3.Using the mouse click on the Buttons to display the Description
4.Click the Close button when you are finished
– Toggle the visibility of toolbars
1.From the Toolbar list, toggle the check boxes to control the visibility of the toolbars
2.Click the Close button when you are finished

Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Overview
• Ansoft HFSS Desktop
– The Ansoft HFSS Desktop provides an intuitive, easy-to-use interface for developing passive RF device models.
Creating designs, involves the following:
1. Parametric Model Generation – creating the geometry, boundaries and excitations
2. Analysis Setup – defining solution setup and frequency sweeps
3. Results – creating 2D reports and field plots
4. Solve Loop - the solution process is fully automated
– To understand how these processes co-exist, examine the illustration shown on the next page.

Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Overview
Solution TypeSolution TypeSolution TypeSolution Type
BoundariesBoundariesBoundariesBoundaries
ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations
MeshMeshMeshMesh
OperationsOperationsOperationsOperations
AnalysisAnalysisAnalysisAnalysis
Solution SetupSolution SetupSolution SetupSolution Setup
Frequency SweepFrequency SweepFrequency SweepFrequency Sweep
Parametric ModelParametric ModelParametric ModelParametric Model
Geometry/MaterialsGeometry/MaterialsGeometry/MaterialsGeometry/Materials
ResultsResultsResultsResults
2D Reports2D Reports2D Reports2D Reports
FieldsFieldsFieldsFields
MeshMeshMeshMesh
RefinementRefinementRefinementRefinement
SolveSolveSolveSolve
UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdate
ConvergedConvergedConvergedConverged
AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze
FinishedFinishedFinishedFinished
Solve LoopSolve LoopSolve LoopSolve Loop
NONONONO
YESYESYESYES

Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Opening a Design
• Opening a HFSS project
– This section describes how to open a new or existing project.
– Opening a New project
• To open a new project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > New.
2. Select the menu Project > Insert HFSS Design.
– Opening an Existing HFSS project
• To open an existing project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window,
select the menu File > Open.
Use the Open dialog to select
the project.
2. Click Open to open the project
– Opening an Existing Project from Explorer
• You can open a project directly from the Microsoft Windows Explorer.
• To open a project from Windows Explorer, do one of the following:
– Double-click on the name of the project in Windows Explorer.
– Right-click the name of the project in Windows Explorer and select Open from the shortcut menu.

Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Solution Type
• Set Solution Type
– This section describes how to set the Solution Type. The Solution Type defines the type of results, how the excitations
are defined, and the convergence. The following Solution Types are available:
1. Driven Modal - calculates the modal-based S-parameters. The S-matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of
the incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes.
2. Driven Terminal - calculates the terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports. The S-
matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of terminal voltages and currents.
3. Eignemode – calculate the eigenmodes, or resonances, of a structure. The Eigenmode solver finds the resonant
frequencies of the structure and the fields at those resonant frequencies.
– Convergence
• Driven Modal – Delta S for modal S-Parameters. This was the only convergence method available for Driven
Solutions in previous versions.
• Driven Terminal – Delta S for the single-ended or differential nodal S-Parameters.
• Eigenmode - Delta F
– To set the solution type:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Solution Type
2. Solution Type Window:
1. Choose one of the following:
1.Driven Modal
2.Driven Terminal
3.Eigenmode
2. Click the OK button

Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Converting older files
• Converting Older HFSS file to HFSS v11
– Because of changes to the HFSS files with the development of HFSS v11, opening a HFSS document from an earlier
release may take more time than you are used to experiencing. However, once the file has been opened and saved,
subsequent opening time will return to normal
– Ansoft HFSS v11 provides a way for you to automatically convert your HFSS projects from an earlier version to the
HFSS v11 format.
– To access HFSS projects in an earlier version.
• From HFSS v11,
1. Select the menu item File > Open
2. Open dialog
1.Files of Type: Ansoft HFSS Project Files (.hfss)
2.Browse to the existing project and select the .hfss file
3.Click the Open button

1-1
February 23, 2009
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 2 – Simulation Basics
Ansoft HFSS - User Guide

Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• What is HFSS (High Frequency Structure Simulator)?
– “HFSS is the industry-standard software for S-parameter, full-wave SPICE extraction and
electromagnetic simulation of high-frequency and high-speed components. HFSS is widely used for
the design of on-chip embedded passives, PCB interconnects, antennas, RF/microwave components,
and high-frequency IC packages.”
– “HFSS improves engineering productivity, reduces development time, and better assures first-pass
design success. The latest release of HFSS delivers significant productivity gains to Microwave/RF
engineers and expands electromagnetic co-design to a new segment of engineers working in the
areas of RF/analog IC and multi-gigabit designs as well as EMI/EMC.”

Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
GUIGUIGUIGUI
MeshMeshMeshMesh SolverSolverSolverSolver

Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS – Methodology
• HFSS uses the Finite Element Method (FEM) to solve Maxwell‘s equations.
– The primary advantage of the FEM for solving partial differential equations lies in the ability of the basic building blocks
used to discretize the model to confrom to arbitrary geometry.
– The arbitrary shape of the basic building block (tetrahedron) also allows HFSS to generate a coarse mesh where fewer
cells are needed to yield an accuate solution, while creating a finely discretized mesh where the field is rapidly varying
or higher accuaracy is needed to obtain an accurate global solution.
• The FEM has been a standard for solving electromagnetic problems since the
inception of HFSS in 1990.
– The FEM has been a standard for solving problems in structure mechanics since the mid 1950‘s.
TetrahedronTetrahedronTetrahedronTetrahedron

Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Technology
• Tangential Vector Finite Elements
• Transfinite Element Method
• Adaptive Meshing
Vertex: ExplicitlyVertex: ExplicitlyVertex: ExplicitlyVertex: Explicitly
SolvedSolvedSolvedSolved
Edge: ExplicitlyEdge: ExplicitlyEdge: ExplicitlyEdge: Explicitly
SolvedSolvedSolvedSolved
Face:Face:Face:Face:
InterpolatedInterpolatedInterpolatedInterpolated
InitialInitialInitialInitial ConvergedConvergedConvergedConverged

Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• The “Solve”
Create Initial
Mesh
Solve fields using the
Finite Element Method
Max(|∆∆∆∆S|)<goal?
Calculate local
Solution error
Generate New Mesh
Calculate broad band
s-parameters (if desired)
no
yes
Start
HFSS – Automated solution process

Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
• The finite element method (FEM) can be used to approximate the
unknown curve F(x).
• The model is “discretized” into 6 individual cells. w0 – w6 are the
piecewise linear “basis functions” from which the approximate
solution will be built.
x
F(x)
1
w1
1
0
2
w2
3
w3
4
w4
5
w5
6
w6w0

Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
• In the FEM, the unknown function is expressed as a weighted sum of the
piecewise continuous basis functions.
x
F(x)
1
Node 1 2 3 4 5 6
F’(x)=ΣΣΣΣa wi i
The approximate solution resulting from the FEMThe approximate solution resulting from the FEMThe approximate solution resulting from the FEMThe approximate solution resulting from the FEM
calculation iscalculation iscalculation iscalculation is F’(x) shown as a dotted line.shown as a dotted line.shown as a dotted line.shown as a dotted line.

Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• A key feature of the FEM, as it is implemented in HFSS, is the ability to locally
determine the error. Recall that F(x) is not known, but the ERROR can be
determined1.
x
F(x)
Node 1 2 3 4 5 6
1D FEM Example
1 D. K. Sun, Z. Cendes, J.-Fa Lee, „Adaptive Mesh Refinement, h-Version, for Solving Multiport
Microwave Devices in Three Dimensions, IEEE Trans Magnetics, pp 1596-1599, Vol. 36, N.4, July 2000
Error!

Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1D FEM Example
• The mesh density is increased where the error is largest. Hence, the final
(and computationally most expensive) solution will have a mesh that yields
the greatest accuracy with the fewest possible mesh cells.
x
F(x)
1
Node 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
The key to success
• Finite elements and adaptive meshing
– Optimal, geometrically conformal mesh created automatically by the
software
• Remove requirements for “meshing expertise”
Vertex: Explicitly SolvedVertex: Explicitly SolvedVertex: Explicitly SolvedVertex: Explicitly Solved
Edge: Explicitly SolvedEdge: Explicitly SolvedEdge: Explicitly SolvedEdge: Explicitly Solved
Face: InterpolatedFace: InterpolatedFace: InterpolatedFace: Interpolated

Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adaptive Meshing - Example
• Example
– 11.5GHz patch antenna
– Mesh elements concentrate at the perimeter of the patch
– Optimal mesh automatically generated by HFSS

Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Quick Start
• Quick Example – Coax Tee • HFSS – High Frequency Structure
Simulator
– Full-Wave 3D field solver
– Solves for the fields in an arbitrary volume
Coax DielectricCoax DielectricCoax DielectricCoax Dielectric
Coax Center PinCoax Center PinCoax Center PinCoax Center Pin
Outer BoundaryOuter BoundaryOuter BoundaryOuter Boundary
Coax ShieldCoax ShieldCoax ShieldCoax Shield

Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS – Start to Finish
• The Process DesignDesignDesignDesign
Solution TypeSolution TypeSolution TypeSolution Type
BoundariesBoundariesBoundariesBoundaries
ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations
MeshMeshMeshMesh
Solution SetupSolution SetupSolution SetupSolution Setup
Frequency SweepFrequency SweepFrequency SweepFrequency Sweep
Parametric ModelParametric ModelParametric ModelParametric Model
Geometry/MaterialsGeometry/MaterialsGeometry/MaterialsGeometry/Materials
2D Reports2D Reports2D Reports2D Reports
FieldsFieldsFieldsFields
MeshMeshMeshMesh
UpdateUpdateUpdateUpdate
NONONONO
YESYESYESYES

Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Starting HFSS
– Click the Microsoft Start button, select Programs, and select Ansoft > HFSS 11 > HFSS 11
– Or Double click on the HFSS 11 icon on the Windows Desktop
• Adding a Design
– When you first start HFSS a new project with a new design will be automatically added to the Project Tree.
– To include additional designs into an existing project, select the menu item Project > Insert HFSS DesignProject > Insert HFSS DesignProject > Insert HFSS DesignProject > Insert HFSS Design
– Alternatively to open a new project with a new design manually, select the menu item File > NewFile > NewFile > NewFile > New....
Toolbar: Insert HFSS DesignToolbar: Insert HFSS DesignToolbar: Insert HFSS DesignToolbar: Insert HFSS Design

Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft Desktop
MenuMenuMenuMenu
barbarbarbar
ProgressProgressProgressProgress
MessageMessageMessageMessage
with projectwith projectwith projectwith project
treetreetreetree
StatusStatusStatusStatus
barbarbarbar
ToolbarsToolbarsToolbarsToolbars

Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Project Manager
• Ansoft Desktop – Project Manager
– Multiple Designs per Project
– Multiple Projects per Desktop
– Integrated Optimetrics Setup
• Requires License for Analysis
Design ResultsDesign ResultsDesign ResultsDesign Results
Design SetupDesign SetupDesign SetupDesign Setup
Design AutomationDesign AutomationDesign AutomationDesign Automation
•ParametricParametricParametricParametric
•OptimizationOptimizationOptimizationOptimization
•SensitivitySensitivitySensitivitySensitivity
•StatisticalStatisticalStatisticalStatistical
Project Manager WindowProject Manager WindowProject Manager WindowProject Manager Window

Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler
EdgeEdgeEdgeEdge
VertexVertexVertexVertex
PlanePlanePlanePlane
Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)Coordinate System (CS)
OriginOriginOriginOrigin
FaceFaceFaceFace
Modeler WindowModeler WindowModeler WindowModeler Window
GraphicsGraphicsGraphicsGraphics
areaareaareaarea
ModelerModelerModelerModeler
design treedesign treedesign treedesign tree
Context menuContext menuContext menuContext menu

Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Set Solution Type
– To set the solution type:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Solution Type
• Solution Type Window:
– Choose Driven Terminal
– Click the OK button
• HFSS - Solution Types
– Driven Modal - calculates the modal-based S-parameters. The S-matrix solutions will be expressed in terms of the
incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes.
• Generalized S-parameters
– Driven Terminal - calculates the terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports. The S-matrix
solutions will be expressed in terms of terminal voltages and currents.
– Eigenmode – calculate the eigenmodes, or resonances, of a structure. The Eigenmode solver finds the resonant
frequencies of the structure and the fields at those resonant frequencies.
– Convergence
• Driven Modal – Delta S for modal S-Parameters.
• Driven Terminal – Delta S for the single-ended or differential nodal S-Parameters.
• Eigenmode - Delta F

Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Set Model Units
– To set the units:
• Select the menu item Modeler > Units
• Set Model Units:
– Select Units: mm
• Set Default Material
– To set the default material:
• Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose Select
• Select Definition Window:
– Type pec in the Search by Name field

Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler – Create a Primitive
• The Coordinate Entry fields allow equations to be entered for position values.
– Examples: 2*5, 2+6+8, 2*cos(10*(pi/180)).
– Variables are not allowed in the Coordinate Entry Field
• NoteNoteNoteNote: Trig functions are in radians
Point 2Point 2Point 2Point 2
Grid PlaneGrid PlaneGrid PlaneGrid Plane
Base RectangleBase RectangleBase RectangleBase Rectangle

Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler – Object Properties
AttributesAttributesAttributesAttributes
CommandsCommandsCommandsCommands
AttributesAttributesAttributesAttributes
CommandsCommandsCommandsCommands

Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Modeler - Attributes

Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Set Grid Plane
– To set the Grid Plane:
• Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ
• Create Coax Pin
– To create the coax pin:
• Select the menu item Draw > Cylinder
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center position
– X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius of the cylinder
– dX: 0.0, dY: 0.86, dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height of the cylinder
– dX: 6.0, dY: 0.0 dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
– Continued on Next Page

Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Create Coax Pin (Continued)
– To Parameterize the Height
• Select the Command tab from the Properties window
• Height: H
• Press the Tab key
• Add Variable Window
– Value: 6mm
– To set the name:
• Select the Attribute tab from the Properties window.
• For the Value of Name type: Coax_Pin
– To set the color:
• Click the Edit button
– To set the transparency:
• Click the OK button
– To finish editing the object properties
– To fit the view:
• Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View

Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler - Views
– View > Modify Attributes >
• Orientation – Predefined/Custom View Angles
• Lighting – Control angle, intensity, and color of light
• Projection – Control camera and perspective
• Background Color – Control color of 3D Modeler background
– View > Active View Visibility - Controls the display of: 3D Modeler
Objects, Color Keys, Boundaries, Excitations, Field Plots
– View > Options – Stereo Mode, Drag Optimization, Color Key Defaults,
Default Rotation
– View > Render > Wire Frame or Smooth Shaded (Default)
– View > Coordinate System > Hide or Small (Large)
– View > Grid Setting – Controls the grid display
Toolbar: Toggle Grid VisibilityToolbar: Toggle Grid VisibilityToolbar: Toggle Grid VisibilityToolbar: Toggle Grid Visibility

Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Changing the View
– Context Menu
– Shortcuts
• Since changing the view is a frequently used operation, some useful shortcut keys exist. Press the appropriate
keys and drag the mouse with the left button pressed:
– ALT + Drag – Rotate
• In addition, there are 9 pre-defined view angles that can be selected by holding the ALT key and double clicking on the
locations shown on the next page.
– Shift + Drag - Pan
– ALT + Shift + Drag – Dynamic Zoom
PanPanPanPan
Rotate AroundRotate AroundRotate AroundRotate Around
Model CenterModel CenterModel CenterModel Center
Dynamic ZoomDynamic ZoomDynamic ZoomDynamic Zoom
Zoom In/OutZoom In/OutZoom In/OutZoom In/Out
TopTopTopTop
BottomBottomBottomBottom
RightRightRightRight
Predefined View AnglesPredefined View AnglesPredefined View AnglesPredefined View Angles
LeftLeftLeftLeft
Current AxisCurrent AxisCurrent AxisCurrent Axis
Screen CenterScreen CenterScreen CenterScreen Center
Fit AllFit AllFit AllFit All
Fit SelectedFit SelectedFit SelectedFit Selected

Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Set Default Material
– To set the default material:
• Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose vacuum
• Create Coax
– To create the coax:
• Select the menu item Draw > Cylinder
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center position
– X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius of the cylinder
– dX: 0.0, dY: 2.0, dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
• Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height of the cylinder
– dX: 6.0, dY: 0.0 dZ: 0.0, Press the Enter key
– To Parameterize the Height:
• Select the Command tab from the Properties window
• Height: H
– To set the name:
• For the Value of Name type: Coax
• Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View

Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Create Excitation
– Face Selection
• Select the menu item Edit > Select > Faces
• By moving the mouse, graphically highlight the top face of the Coax object
• Click the left mouse button to select the face
– Assign Excitation
• Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave Port
• Reference Conductors for Terminals
– Conducting Objects: Coax_pin
– Press OK
– Note: Reference conductors are not shown because we are using Outer boundary condition as the
reference conductor. Port properties can be accessed by double clicking on Waveport1 in Project tree

Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Terminal Assignment
Step 1: Assign PortStep 1: Assign PortStep 1: Assign PortStep 1: Assign Port Step 2: Choose Conductors/ReferenceStep 2: Choose Conductors/ReferenceStep 2: Choose Conductors/ReferenceStep 2: Choose Conductors/Reference
Note: Dialog Remembers Reference ConductorsNote: Dialog Remembers Reference ConductorsNote: Dialog Remembers Reference ConductorsNote: Dialog Remembers Reference Conductors

Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Duplicate boundaries with geometry
– Works with all boundaries and excitations
– Select the menu item Tools > Options > HFSS Options
– HFSS Options Window:
• Click the General tab
– Use Wizards for data entry when creating new boundaries: Checked
– Duplicate boundaries with geometry: Checked
– Example:
• Assign an Excitation to the face of an object
• Duplicate the object around an axis three times
• The Excitation is automatically duplicated

Introduction
1-32
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Set Object Selection
– Set select to objects
• Select the menu item Edit > Select > Objects
• Create Tee
– To create Tee:
• Select the menu item Edit > Select All Visible. Or press the CTRL+A key.
• Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Around Axis.
– Axis: Z
– Angle: 90
– Total Number: 3
• Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active View.

Introduction
1-33
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Unite Conductors
– Select Conductors
• Select the menu item Edit > Select > By Name
• Select Object Dialog,
– Select the objects named: Coax_Pin, Coax_Pin_1, Coax_Pin_2
– Unite
• Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > Unite
• Unite Coax
– Select Coax
• Select the menu item Edit > Select > By Name
• Select Object Dialog,
– Select the objects named: Coax, Coax_1, Coax_2
– Unite
• Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > Unite

Introduction
1-34
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solution Setup
• Creating an Analysis Setup
– To create an analysis setup:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
• Solution Setup Window:
– Click the General tab:
• Solution Frequency: 10.0 GHz
Adapt FrequencyAdapt FrequencyAdapt FrequencyAdapt Frequency
Add Solution SetupAdd Solution SetupAdd Solution SetupAdd Solution Setup

Introduction
1-35
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Adding a Frequency Sweep
– To add a frequency sweep:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Sweep
– Select Solution Setup: Setup1
• Edit Sweep Window:
– Sweep Type: Fast
– Frequency Setup Type: Linear Step
• Start: 1.0 GHz
• Stop: 10.0 GHz
• Step: 0.1 GHz
• Save Fields: Checked
• HFSS – Frequency Sweep
– Discrete – Solves using adaptive mesh at every frequency
• Matrix Data and Fields at every frequency in sweep
– Fast - ALPS
• Matrix Data and Fields at every frequency in sweep
– Interpolating – Adaptively determines discrete solve
points using the adaptive mesh
• Matrix Data at every frequency in sweeps
• Fields at last adaptive solution
Add SweepAdd SweepAdd SweepAdd Sweep

Introduction
1-36
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
See: IEEE Trans. Microwave Theory Tech., Vol. 46, No. 9, Sept. 1998
• Interpolating Sweep
– The calculation of wide-band s-parameters in HFSS is achieved using the interpolating sweep. This method fits s-
parameter data to a rational polynomial transfer function using a minimum number of discrete finite element method
(FEM) solutions.
– The interpolating sweep yields the poles and zeros of the transfer function. This information can be directly used in the
Laplace Element from which a Full-Wave SPICE™ model can be generated (HSPICE, Spectre RF, PSPICE).
( )( ) ( )
( )( ) ( )11
11
...
...
pspsps
zszszs
S
qqq
qqq
−−−
−−−
=
−
−
α
β
Rational Polynomial:
S11(dB)
Example: Interpolating SweepExample: Interpolating SweepExample: Interpolating SweepExample: Interpolating Sweep
5 cm microstrip transmission line5 cm microstrip transmission line5 cm microstrip transmission line5 cm microstrip transmission line

Introduction
1-37
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
S11(dB)
Adaptive Frequency
S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)S11(dB)
DONE!

Introduction
1-38
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Save Project
– To save the project:
• In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > Save As.
• From the Save As window, type the Filename: hfss_coax_tee
• Click the Save button
• Analyze
• Model Validation
– To validate the model:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Validation Check
• Click the Close button
– Note: To view any errors or warning messages, use the Message Manager.
• Analyze
– To start the solution process:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Analyze All
ValidateValidateValidateValidate Analyze AllAnalyze AllAnalyze AllAnalyze All

Introduction
1-39
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-39
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Create Reports
– To create a report:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report> Rectangular Plot
• New Report Window:
– Solution: Setup1: Sweep1
– Domain: Sweep
• Category: Terminal S Parameter
• Quantity: St(coax_pin_T1, coax_pin_T1), St(coax_pin_T1, coax_pin_T2), St(coax_pin_T2,
coax_pin_T3) Note: Hold Ctrl key to select multiple traces
• Function: db
• Click New Report button
• Click Close button

Introduction
1-40
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-40
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Introduction
1-41
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-41
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Field Overlays
– To create a field plot:
• Select an object to overlay fields
– Select the menu item Edit > Select > By Name
– Select Object Dialog,
• Select the objects named: Coax
• Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Fields > E > Mag_E
• Create Field Plot Window
– Solution: Setup1 : LastAdaptive
– Quantity: Mag_E
– In Volume: All
– Click the Done button
– To modify the attributes of a field plot:
• Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Modify Plot Attributes
• Select Plot Folder Window:
– Select: E Field
• E-Field Window:
– Click the Scale tab
• Scale: Log
– Click the Plot tab
• IsoValType: IsoValSurface
• Click the Apply button.
• Click the Close button

Introduction
1-42
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-42
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Introduction
1-43
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-43
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Core Technology
– HFSS – High Frequency Structure Simulator
– Arbitrary 3D Volumetric Full-Wave Field Solver
• Ansoft Desktop
– Advanced ACIS based Modeling
– True Parametric Technology – Dynamic Editing
– Powerful Report Generation
– Dynamic Field Visualization
– Design Flow Automation
• Optimetrics/Ansoft Designer/AnsoftLinks
• Advanced Material Types
– Frequency Dependent Materials
– Non-linear Materials
– Anisotropic Materials
• Advanced Boundary Conditions
– Radiation and Perfectly Matched Layers
– Symmetry, Finite Conductivity, Infinite Planes, RLC, and Layered Impedance
– Master/Slave – Unit Cells
• Advanced Solver Technology
– Automatic Conformal Mesh Generation
– Adaptive Mesh Generation
– Internal/External Excitations – Includes Loss
– ALPS Fast Frequency Sweep
– Eigenmode

Introduction
1-44
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-44
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Common HFSS Applications
– Antenna
• Planar Antennas - Patches, Dipoles, Horns, Conformal Cell Phone Antennas, Spirals
• Waveguide – Circular/Square Horns
• Wire – Dipole, Helix
• Arrays - Infinite Arrays, Frequency Selective Surfaces (FSS) & Photonic Band Gaps (PBG)
• Radar Cross Section (RCS)
– Microwave
• Filters – Cavity Filters, Microstrip, Dielectric
• EMC/EMI – Shield Enclosures, Coupling, Near- or Far-Field Radiation
• Connectors – Coax, SFP/XFP, Backplane, Transitions
• Waveguide – Filters, Resonators, Transitions, Couplers
• Silicon/GaSa - Spiral Inductors, Transformers
– Signal Integrity/High-Speed Digital
• Package Modeling – BGA, QFP, Flip-Chip
• PCB Board Modeling – Power/Ground planes, Mesh Grid Grounds, Backplanes
• Connectors – SFP/XFP, VHDM, GBX, NexLev, Coax
• Transitions – Differential/Single-ended Vias

Introduction
1-45
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-45
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Results
• Matrix Data
– Modal/Terminal/Differential
• S-, Y-, and Z-Parameters
• VSWR
– Excitations
• Complex Propagation Constant (Gamma)
• Zo
– Full-Wave Spice
• Full-Wave Spice – Broadband Model
• Lumped RLC – Low Frequency Model
• Partial Fraction - Matlab
• Export Formats – HSPICE, PSPICE, Cadence Spectre, and Maxwell SPICE
– Common Display Formats:
• Rectangular, Polar
• Smith Chart
• Data Tables
– Common Output Formats:
• Neutral Models Files (NMF) (Optimetrics only)
– Parametric Results
• Touchstone, Data Tables, Matlab,
• Citifile
• Graphics – Windows Clipboard

Introduction
1-46
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-46
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
HFSS - Results
• Fields
– Modal/Terminal/Differential
• Electric Field
• Magnetic Field
• Current (Volume/Surface)
• Power
• Specific Absorption Rate
– Radiation
• 2D/3D Far-/Near-Fields
• Arrays – Regular and Custom Setups
• RCS
– Field Calculator
• User Defined Field Calculations
– Common Display Formats
• Volume
• Surface
• Vector
• 2D Reports – Rectangular, Polar, Radiation Patterns
– Common Output Formats:
• Animations – AVI, GIF
• Data Tables
• Graphics – Windows Clipboard, BMP, GIF, JPG, TIFF, VRML

Introduction
1-47
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-47
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler – Model Tree
– Select menu item Modeler > Group by Material
Grouped by MaterialGrouped by MaterialGrouped by MaterialGrouped by Material Object ViewObject ViewObject ViewObject View
MaterialMaterialMaterialMaterial
ObjectObjectObjectObject
Object CommandObject CommandObject CommandObject Command
HistoryHistoryHistoryHistory

Introduction
1-48
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-48
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler – Commands
– Parametric Technology
• Dynamic Edits - Change Dimensions
• Add Variables
– Project Variables (Global) or Design Variables (Local)
– Animate Geometry
– Include Units – Default Unit is meters
• Supports mixed Units

Introduction
1-49
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-49
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler – Primitives
– 2D Draw Objects
• The following 2D Draw objects are available:
– Line, Spline, Arc, Equation Based Curve,
Rectangle, Ellipse, Circle, Regular Polygon,
Equation Based Surface
– 3D Draw Objects
• The following 3D Draw objects are available:
– Box, Cylinder, Regular Polyhedron, Cone,
Sphere, Torus, Helix, Spiral, Bond Wire
Toolbar: 2D ObjectsToolbar: 2D ObjectsToolbar: 2D ObjectsToolbar: 2D Objects Toolbar: 3D ObjectsToolbar: 3D ObjectsToolbar: 3D ObjectsToolbar: 3D Objects

Introduction
1-50
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-50
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler – Boolean Operations/Transformations
• Modeler > Boolean >
– Unite – combine multiple primitives
• Unite disjoint objects (Separate Bodies to separate)
– Subtract – remove part of a primitive from another
– Intersect– keep only the parts of primitives that overlap
– Split – break primitives into multiple parts along a plane (XY, YZ, XZ)
– Split Crossing Objects – splits objects along a plane (XY, YZ, XZ) only where they intersect
– Separate Bodies – separates objects which are united but not physically connected into individual objects
• Modeler > Surfaces > Move Faces – Resize or Reposition an objects face along a normal or vector.
• Edit > Arrange >
– Move – Translates the structure along a vector
– Rotate – Rotates the shape around a coordinate axis by an angle
– Mirror – Mirrors the shape around a specified plane
– Offset – Performs a uniform scale in x, y, and z.
• Edit > Duplicate >
– Along Line – Create multiple copies of an object along a vector
– Around Axis – Create multiple copies of an object rotated by a fixed angle around the x, y, or z axis
– Mirror - Mirrors the shape around a specified plane and creates a duplicate
• Edit > Scale – Allows non-uniform scaling in the x, y, or z direction
Toolbar: BooleanToolbar: BooleanToolbar: BooleanToolbar: Boolean
Toolbar: ArrangeToolbar: ArrangeToolbar: ArrangeToolbar: Arrange
Toolbar: DuplicateToolbar: DuplicateToolbar: DuplicateToolbar: Duplicate

Introduction
1-51
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-51
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler - Selection
– Selection Types
• Object (Default)
• Face
• Edge
• Vertex
– Selection Modes
• All Objects
• All Visible Object
• By Name
– Highlight Selection Dynamically – By default, moving the mouse pointer over an object will dynamically
highlight the object for selection. To select the object simply click the left mouse button.
• Multiple Object Selection – Hold the CTRL key down to graphically select multiple objects
• Next Behind – To select an object located behind another object, select the front object, press the b key to get
the next behind. Note: The mouse pointer must be located such that the next behind object is under the mouse
pointer.
• To Disable: Select the menu item Tools > Options > 3D Modeler Options
– From the Display Tab, uncheck Highlight selection dynamically
Dynamically HighlightedDynamically HighlightedDynamically HighlightedDynamically Highlighted
(Only frame of object)(Only frame of object)(Only frame of object)(Only frame of object)
SelectedSelectedSelectedSelected

Introduction
1-52
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-52
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Modeler – Moving Around
Step 1: Start PointStep 1: Start PointStep 1: Start PointStep 1: Start Point Step 2: Hold X key and select vertex pointStep 2: Hold X key and select vertex pointStep 2: Hold X key and select vertex pointStep 2: Hold X key and select vertex point
Step 3: CTRL+Enter Keys set a local referenceStep 3: CTRL+Enter Keys set a local referenceStep 3: CTRL+Enter Keys set a local referenceStep 3: CTRL+Enter Keys set a local reference Step 4: Hold Z key and set heightStep 4: Hold Z key and set heightStep 4: Hold Z key and set heightStep 4: Hold Z key and set height
Edge Center SnapEdge Center SnapEdge Center SnapEdge Center Snap
Toolbar: Snap ModeToolbar: Snap ModeToolbar: Snap ModeToolbar: Snap Mode

Introduction
1-53
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-53
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Step 1: Select FaceStep 1: Select FaceStep 1: Select FaceStep 1: Select Face Step 2: Select OriginStep 2: Select OriginStep 2: Select OriginStep 2: Select Origin
Step 3: Set XStep 3: Set XStep 3: Set XStep 3: Set X----AxisAxisAxisAxis New Working CSNew Working CSNew Working CSNew Working CS
• Modeler – Coordinate System
– Can be Parameterized
– Working Coordinate System
• Currently selected CS. This can be a local or global CS
– Global CS
• The default fixed coordinate system
– Relative CS
• User defined local coordinate system.
– Offset
– Rotated
– Both
– Face CS (setting available to automatically switch to face coordinate system in the 3D Modeler Options)
Cone created with Face CSCone created with Face CSCone created with Face CSCone created with Face CS
Change Box Size and Cone isChange Box Size and Cone isChange Box Size and Cone isChange Box Size and Cone is
automatically positioned withautomatically positioned withautomatically positioned withautomatically positioned with
the top face of the boxthe top face of the boxthe top face of the boxthe top face of the box
Toolbar: Coordinate SystemToolbar: Coordinate SystemToolbar: Coordinate SystemToolbar: Coordinate System

Introduction
1-54
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-54
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
(Overlap between two cylinders)(Overlap between two cylinders)(Overlap between two cylinders)(Overlap between two cylinders)
• Overlapping Geometry
– Definition: When an object occupies volume in multiple 3D objects. This does not apply to sheet objects
– Solution:
• Metal Overlapping Dielectrics
– Resolution: Set Material Override
• Menu item: HFSS > Set Material Override
• Dielectrics Overlapping Dielectrics
– Resolution: Correct the Overlap
• Split the overlapping object into multiple pieces
• Subtract the overlapping geometries

Introduction
1-55
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-55
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Feature Removal
HolesHolesHolesHoles
BlendsBlendsBlendsBlends
Step 1: Enter Feature Detection OptionsStep 1: Enter Feature Detection OptionsStep 1: Enter Feature Detection OptionsStep 1: Enter Feature Detection Options

Introduction
1-56
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-56
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Automatic Feature Removal
RemovedRemovedRemovedRemoved
Note:Note:Note:Note: There are two modes of operation for the feature removal: Healing
and Model Analysis. Model Analysis was used here and allows the user to
manually select which geometry features are removed. For healing, all
features that meet the user defined criteria are automatically removed.
Both options are found in the menu item Modeler > Model AnalysisModeler > Model AnalysisModeler > Model AnalysisModeler > Model Analysis
Step 2: Select Features to RemoveStep 2: Select Features to RemoveStep 2: Select Features to RemoveStep 2: Select Features to Remove

Introduction
1-57
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-57
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• HFSS – Matrix Data
– HFSS > Results > Solution Data
– Export
• NMF, Touchstone, Data Tables, Citifile, MATLAB (*.m)
• NOTE: Make sure the Simulation is set to a Sweep before exporting. The Adaptive Passes will only export a
single frequency point.
– Equivalent Circuit Export
• HSPICE, PSPICE, Spectre, Maxwell SPICE

Introduction
1-58
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-58
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Results – Data Management
– HFSS > Results > Browse Solutions
• Solved model variations are retained.
Unless otherwise notified by HFSS.
– HFSS > Results > Clean Up Solutions
– HFSS > Results > Import Solutions

Introduction
1-59
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-59
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Results – Create Reports
– HFSS > Results > Create Report
– Output Variables
• User Defined Equations

Introduction
1-60
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-60
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Fields
– Select Object Volume, Surface, or Line to display fields
– HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields >
– Modify Plot – Solution/Frequency/Qty
– Plot Attributes
– Edit Sources – Change Excitation

Introduction
1-61
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-61
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Mesh Display
– Field Overlay
• Select an object
• Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Mesh

Introduction
1-62
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-62
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Measure
– Modeler > Measure >
• Position – Points and Distance
• Length – Edge Length
• Area – Surface Area
• Volume – Object Volume

Introduction
1-63
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-63
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Solver Technology
MeshMeshMeshMesh
MeshMeshMeshMesh
NONONONO
YESYESYESYES

Introduction
1-64
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-64
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Higher-Order Basis Functions
• Solver - Higher-Order Basis Functions
– Basis functions are hierarchical
– Increased Accuracy with less elements
– Convergence is a function of basis order
H0(curl)
elements
H1(curl)
elements
H2(curl)
elements
1111stststst OrderOrderOrderOrder 2222ndndndnd OrderOrderOrderOrder

Introduction
1-65
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-65
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Iterative Solver
• How does it work?
– The Iterative Matrix Solver works by “guessing” a solution to the matrix of unknowns, and then
recursively updating the “guess” until an error tolerance has been reached
• What is the advantage?
– Reduced RAM and Simulation Time
• Where do you control the Iterative Solver?
– Options Tab from Solution Setup dialog
Initial guess
Preconditioner
Update solution and search
direction
Converges ?
yes
no

Introduction
1-66
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-66
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Basis Functions & Iterative Solver
How many passes on computer w/8GB RAM?How many passes on computer w/8GB RAM?How many passes on computer w/8GB RAM?How many passes on computer w/8GB RAM?
• Direct: 3 PassesDirect: 3 PassesDirect: 3 PassesDirect: 3 Passes
• Iterative: 11 PassesIterative: 11 PassesIterative: 11 PassesIterative: 11 Passes
Copper WallCopper WallCopper WallCopper Wall
Increased Capacity (4x)Increased Capacity (4x)Increased Capacity (4x)Increased Capacity (4x)
IterativeIterativeIterativeIterativeDirectDirectDirectDirect
4x Capacity on Same Machine4x Capacity on Same Machine4x Capacity on Same Machine4x Capacity on Same Machine
2x Unknowns2x Unknowns2x Unknowns2x Unknowns –––– 2x Memory2x Memory2x Memory2x Memory
Volume: 447cubic wavelengths

Introduction
1-67
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-67
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
IterativeIterativeIterativeIterative DirectDirectDirectDirect
IterativeIterativeIterativeIterative DirectDirectDirectDirect
3.2x Less RAM3.2x Less RAM3.2x Less RAM3.2x Less RAM
6.4x Faster6.4x Faster6.4x Faster6.4x Faster
Iterative and DirectIterative and DirectIterative and DirectIterative and Direct
Converge in 3 PassesConverge in 3 PassesConverge in 3 PassesConverge in 3 Passes

Introduction
1-68
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-68
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Options – General
– Tools > Options > General Options
• Temp Directory – Location used during solution process
– Make sure it is at least 512MB free disk.
• Options - HFSS
– Tools > Options > HFSS Options > Solver
• Number of Processors – Requires additional license
• Desired RAM Limit – leave it unchecked for auto-detect
• Maximum RAM Limit – leave it unchecked for auto-detect
• Process Priority – set the simulation priority from Critical
(highest) to Idle (lowest)

Introduction
1-69
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-69
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Project Files
– Everything regarding the project is stored in an ascii file
• File: <project_name>.hfss
• Double click from Windows Explorer will open and launch HFSS v11
– Results and Mesh are stored in a folder named <project_name>.hfssresults
– Lock file: <project_name>.lock.hfss
• Created when a project is opened
– Auto Save File: <project_name>.hfss.auto
• When recovering, software only checks date
– If an error occurred when saving the auto file, the date will be newer then the original
– Look at file size (provided in recover dialog)
• Converting Older HFSS Projects HFSS v9 and HFSS v10 to HFSS v11
– From HFSS v11.0,
• Select the menu item File > Open
• Open dialog
– Files of Type: Ansoft HFSS Project Files (.hfss)
– Browse to the existing project and select the .hfss file
– Click the Open button
• Legacy License
– The v11 license allows users to run HFSS v9.2.1, v10.1.3 or 11.x.
• NOTE: Once a project is saved in v11 it can no longer be opened in previous versions

Introduction
1-70
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-70
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Recommended Service Packs (SP) – PC only
– Microsoft Windows XP - SP2 or higher
• Memory allocation 32-bit Windows
– Since the release of HFSS v9.2 you can access sup to 3GB of Ram on a 32-bit PC
– All about 3GB switch, supported OS
• http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;291988
– How to use /3GB switch
• http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/ddtools/hh/ddtools/bootini_1fcj.asp
– Possible problems
• http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;328269
• Increasing Memory allocation HFSS v11
– Since the release of HFSS v10, the solver in HFSS is 64bit and can access a large memory footprint.
• Linux Operating Systems
– Red Hat Enterprise 3 and 4
– SUSE Linux Enterprise 9.x
– Note: Requires OpenGL
– Note: Please perform required OS updates outlined in readme file on the CD

Introduction
1-71
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-71
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Distributed Solve Option
• Distributed Analysis
– Automated parser management and reassembly of data
– Parametric tables and studies
– Frequency sweeps for discrete, fast, and interpolating
– Per license, distributed analysis allows up to 10 parallel simulations on remote machines, providing
near-linear reduction of simulation run times

Introduction
1-72
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-72
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Scripts
– Default Script recorded in v11
• Visual Basic Script
• Distributed/Remote Solve
– Tools > Options > General Options > Analysis Options
• Uses Windows DCOM
LocalLocalLocalLocal RemoteRemoteRemoteRemote DistributedDistributedDistributedDistributed

Introduction
1-73
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
2-73
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• For Technical Support
– The following link will direct you to the Ansoft Support Page. The Ansoft Support Pages provide additional
documentation, training, and application notes. Web Site: http://www.ansoft.com/support.cfm
• Application Engineers for North America
– The names and numbers in this list may change without notice
• 9-4 EST:
– Pittsburgh, PA
– Burlington, MA
• 9-4 PST:
– San Jose, CA
– Portland, OR
• (503) 906-7947
– Irvine, CA
• (714) 417-9311 x6

1-1
February 23, 2009
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 3 – Boundary
Conditions

Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Why are They Critical?
– For most practical problems, the solution to Maxwell’s equations requires a
rigorous matrix approach such as the Finite Element Method (FEM) which
is used by Ansoft HFSS.
• The wave equation solved by Ansoft HFSS is derived from the
differential form of Maxwell’s equations.
– For these expressions to be valid, it is assumed that the field vectors are:
• single-valued,
• bounded, and have a
• continuous distribution (along with their derivatives)
– Along boundaries of media or at sources,
• Field vectors are discontinuous
• Derivatives of the field vectors have no meaning
Boundary Conditions
0=⋅∇
=⋅∇
∂
∂
+=×∇
∂
∂
−=×∇
B
D
t
D
JH
t
B
E
ρ
Boundary Conditions define the field behavior across discontinuoBoundary Conditions define the field behavior across discontinuoBoundary Conditions define the field behavior across discontinuoBoundary Conditions define the field behavior across discontinuous boundariesus boundariesus boundariesus boundaries

Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Why do I Care?
– They Force the fields to align with the definition of the boundary condition
• As a user I should be asking
– What assumptions, about the fields, do the boundary conditions make?
– Are these assumptions appropriate for the structure being simulated?
– Model Scope
• To reduce the infinite space of the real world to a finite volume, Ansoft HFSS automatically
applies a boundary to the surface surrounding the geometric model
– Outer boundary
– Default Boundary: Perfect E
– Model Complexity
• To reduce the complexity of a model, the boundary conditions can be used to improve the:
– Solution Time
– Computer Resources
Failure to understand boundary conditions may lead to inconsisteFailure to understand boundary conditions may lead to inconsisteFailure to understand boundary conditions may lead to inconsisteFailure to understand boundary conditions may lead to inconsistent resultsnt resultsnt resultsnt results
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• What are Common Ansoft HFSS Boundary Conditions?
– Excitations
• Wave Ports (External)
• Lumped Ports (Internal)
– Surface Approximations
• Perfect E or Perfect H Surface
• Finite Conductivity Surface
• Impedance Surface
• Layered Impedance Surface
• Lumped RLC
• Symmetry Planes
• Radiation Surface
• Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)
– Strictly not a surface approximation
• Master/ Slave
– Material Properties
• Boundary between two dielectrics
• Finite Conductivity of a conductor
Largely the users responsibilityLargely the users responsibilityLargely the users responsibilityLargely the users responsibility
Transparent to the userTransparent to the userTransparent to the userTransparent to the user
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Perfect E – Forces the electric field perpendicular to the surface
– Outer Surface – Default Boundary
– PEC/Perfect Conductor Material Property
– Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating conductor loss
• Perfect H – Forces the electric field tangent to the surface
• Finite Conductivity – Lossy electric conductor.
– Forces the tangential electric field at the surface to: Zs(n x Htan).
• The surface impedance (Zs) is equal to, (1+j)/(δσδσδσδσ),
• Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating conductor thickness
• Impedance Surface – Represent surfaces of a known impedance
– Forces the tangential electric field at the surface to: Zs(n x Htan).
• The surface impedance (Zs) is equal to, Rs + jXs (Ohms/Square)
– Layered Impedance – Models multiple thin layers in a structure as an Impedance Surface
– Lumped RLC – Parallel combination
Perfect E SurfacePerfect E SurfacePerfect E SurfacePerfect E Surface
Perfect H Surface
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Symmetry Planes – Enable you to model only part of a structure
– Perfect E or Perfect H Symmetry Planes
• Must be exposed to the outer surface
• Must be on a planar surface
• Remember! Mechanical Symmetry does not Equal Electrical Symmetry
– Model complexity: Reduced by eliminating part of the solution volume
Full ModelFull ModelFull ModelFull Model
Perfect E SymmetryPerfect E SymmetryPerfect E SymmetryPerfect E Symmetry
Perfect H SymmetryPerfect H SymmetryPerfect H SymmetryPerfect H Symmetry
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Radiation Surface – Allows waves to radiate infinitely far into space.
– The boundary absorbs wave at the radiation surface
– Can be placed on arbitrary surfaces
– Accuracy depends on
• The distance between the boundary and the radiating object
– The radiation boundary should be located at least one-quarter of a wavelength from a radiating structure. If
you are simulating a structure that does not radiate, the boundary can be located less then one-quarter of a
wave length (The validity of this assumption will require your engineering judgment).
• The incident angle
– The radiation boundary will reflect varying amounts of energy depending on the incidence angle. The best
performance is achieved at normal incidence. Avoid angles greater then ~30degrees. In addition, the
radiation boundary must remain convex relative to the wave.
• Perfectly Matched Layer (PML) – Allows waves to radiate infinitely far into space.
– Not a Boundary Condition.
– Fictitious materials that fully absorb the electromagnetic fields impinging upon them.
– These materials are complex anisotropic.
• Types
– Free Space Termination or Reflection Free Termination
• Can only be placed on planar surface
• Model complexity: They do not suffer from the distance or incident angle issues, but should be place at least
one-tenth of a wave length from strong radiators
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Infinite Ground Planes – Simulate the effects of an infinite ground plane
– Only affects the calculation of near- or far-field radiation during post processing
– Types: Perfect E, Finite Conductivity, or Impedance Surface
• Frequency Dependent Boundary Conditions
– The following boundary parameters can be assigned an expression that includes Freq:
• Finite Conductivity
• Impedance
• Lumped RLC
• Layered Impedance
– Supported Frequency Sweeps
• Single Frequency
• Discrete Sweep
• Interpolating Sweep
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Ports
– Unique type of boundary condition
• Allow energy to flow into and out of a structure.
• Defined on 2D planar surface
• Arbitrary port solver calculates the natural field patterns or modes
– Assumes semi-infinitely long waveguide
• Same cross-section and material properties as port surface
– 2D field patterns serve as boundary conditions for the full 3D problem
• Excitation Types
– Wave Port (Waveguide) – External
• Recommended only for surfaces exposed to the background
• Supports multiple modes (Example: Coupled Lines) and deembedding
• Compute Generalized S-Parameters
– Frequency dependent Characteristic Impedance (Zo)
– Perfectly matched at every frequency
– Lumped Port – Internal
• Recommended only for surfaces internal to geometric model
• Single mode (TEM) and no deembedding
• Normalized to a constant user defined Zo
Port 1Port 1Port 1Port 1
Excitations
MeasurementsMeasurementsMeasurementsMeasurements
Constant ZoConstant ZoConstant ZoConstant Zo

Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Wave Equation
– The field pattern of a traveling wave inside a waveguide can be determined by solving Maxwell’s equations. The
following equation that is solved by the 2D solver is derived directly from Maxwell’s equation.
– where:
• E(x,y) is a phasor representing an oscillating electric field.
• k0 is the free space wave number,
• µr is the complex relative permeability.
• εr is the complex relative permittivity.
– To solve this equation, the 2D solver obtains an excitation field pattern in the form of a phasor solution, E(x,y). These
phasor solutions are independent of z and t; only after being multiplied by e-γz do they become traveling waves.
– Also note that the excitation field pattern computed is valid only at a single frequency. A different excitation field pattern
is computed for each frequency point of interest.
( ) 0),(,
1 2
0 =−





×∇×∇ yxEkyxE r
r
ε
µ

Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Modes, Reflections, and Propagation
– It is also possible for a 3D field solution generated by an excitation signal of one specific mode to contain reflections of
higher-order modes which arise due to discontinuities in a high frequency structure.
– If these higher-order modes are reflected back to the excitation port or transmitted onto another port, the S-parameters
associated with these modes should be calculated.
– If the higher-order mode decays before reaching any port—either because of attenuation due to losses or because it is
a non-propagating evanescent mode—there is no need to obtain the S-parameters for that mode.
• Wave Ports Require a Length of Uniform Cross Section
– Ansoft HFSS assumes that each port you define is connected to a semi-infinitely long waveguide that has the same
cross section as the Wave Port
no uniform cross sectionno uniform cross sectionno uniform cross sectionno uniform cross section
at Wave Portsat Wave Portsat Wave Portsat Wave Ports
uniform cross sectionuniform cross sectionuniform cross sectionuniform cross section
added for each Wave Portadded for each Wave Portadded for each Wave Portadded for each Wave Port

Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Wave Port Boundary Conditions
– Perfect E or Finite Conductivity
• Default: All outer edges are Perfect E boundary.
– Port is defined within a waveguide.
– Easy for enclosed transmission lines: Coax or Waveguide
– Challenging for unbalanced or non-enclosed lines: Microstrip, CPW, Slotline, etc.
– Symmetry or Impedance
• Recognized at the port edges
– Radiation
• Default interface is a Perfect E boundary

Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Lumped Port Boundary Conditions
– Perfect E or Finite Conductivity
• Any port edge that interfaces with a conductor or another port edge
– Perfect H
• All remaining port edges
Perfect H
Perfect H
Perfect E
Perfect E

Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Excitation – Calibration
– Ports must be calibrated to ensure consistent results. Determines:
• Direction and polarity of fields
• Voltage/ Current calculations.
– Solution Type: Driven Modal
• Expressed in terms of the incident and reflected powers of the waveguide modes.
– Definition not desirable for problems having several propagating quasi-TEM modes
• Coupled/Multi-Coupled Transmission Lines
• Always used by the solver
• Calibration: Integration Line
– Phase between Ports
– Modal voltage integration path: Zpi, Zpv, Zvi
– Solution Type: Driven Terminal
• Linear combination of nodal voltages and currents for the Wave Port.
– Equivalent transformation performed from Modal Solution
• Calibration: Terminal Assignments
– Polarity
– Nodal current integration path

Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Example Solution Types:
T1T1T1T1 T2T2T2T2
Integration LineIntegration LineIntegration LineIntegration Line
Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1
(Even Mode)(Even Mode)(Even Mode)(Even Mode)
Integration LineIntegration LineIntegration LineIntegration Line
Mode 2Mode 2Mode 2Mode 2
(Odd Mode)(Odd Mode)(Odd Mode)(Odd Mode)
Modes to NodesModes to NodesModes to NodesModes to Nodes
TransformationTransformationTransformationTransformation
SPICESPICESPICESPICE
Differential PairsDifferential PairsDifferential PairsDifferential Pairs
ModalModalModalModal
Port1Port1Port1Port1 Port2Port2Port2Port2
TerminalTerminalTerminalTerminalPort1Port1Port1Port1 Port2Port2Port2Port2
T1T1T1T1
T2T2T2T2
T1T1T1T1
T2T2T2T2
2 Modes2 Modes2 Modes2 Modes 2 Modes2 Modes2 Modes2 Modes
Excitations

Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Boundary Conditions Application
• Application of Boundary Conditions - Case 1
– Emulate laboratory measurements
• Verification/Validation before production
Picture courtesy of DelphiPicture courtesy of DelphiPicture courtesy of DelphiPicture courtesy of Delphi
Picture courtesy of TektronixPicture courtesy of TektronixPicture courtesy of TektronixPicture courtesy of Tektronix

Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Application of Boundary Conditions - Case 2
– Isolate part of a structure (i.e. Exciting arbitrary transmission lines)
• Not physically possible to measure in the laboratory
• Full-Wave analysis not required for total system
– Or total system too complex
• Design work/Component level optimization
• Post production problem solving
Isolated ComponentIsolated ComponentIsolated ComponentIsolated Component –––– Via TransitionVia TransitionVia TransitionVia Transition
Total SystemTotal SystemTotal SystemTotal System
Boundary Conditions Application

Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Example Structure
– Coax to Stripline
LAYER 2 (SIGNAL)LAYER 2 (SIGNAL)LAYER 2 (SIGNAL)LAYER 2 (SIGNAL)
LAYER 3 (BOTTOM SIDE)LAYER 3 (BOTTOM SIDE)LAYER 3 (BOTTOM SIDE)LAYER 3 (BOTTOM SIDE)
LAYER 1 (TOP SIDE)LAYER 1 (TOP SIDE)LAYER 1 (TOP SIDE)LAYER 1 (TOP SIDE)
Coax to Stripline Example

Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Material Properties
– All 3D (Solid) objects have material definitions
• To complete the model shown previously we must include the air
that surrounds the structure.
airairairair
Note:Note:Note:Note: Substrate/Air boundarySubstrate/Air boundarySubstrate/Air boundarySubstrate/Air boundary
included in structureincluded in structureincluded in structureincluded in structure

Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
– Remember! Material Boundary conditions are transparent to the user
• They are not visible in the Project Tree
• Example Material Boundary: Conductors Surface Approximations
– Perfect Conductors Perfect E Boundary (Boundary Name: smetal)
• Forces E-Field perpendicular to surface
– Lossy Conductors Finite Conductivity Boundary
• Forces tangential E-Field to ((1+j)/(δσδσδσδσ))(n x Htan).
• Assumes one skin depth – User must manually force Ansoft HFSS to
solve inside lossy conductors that are ≤ a skin depth
smetalsmetalsmetalsmetal

Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Surface Approximations
– Background or Outer Boundary
• Not visible in the Project Tree
• Any object surface that touches it Perfect E Boundary
• Default boundary applied to the region surrounding the geometric model
– Model is encased in a thin metal layer that no fields propagate through
Override withOverride withOverride withOverride with
Radiation BoundaryRadiation BoundaryRadiation BoundaryRadiation Boundary
outerouterouterouter

Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• What Port Type Should I Use?
– Example is easy decision
• Port touches background (External)
• Cross Section is Coax (Enclosed Transmission Line)
– Wave Port
• Solution Type: Driven Terminal
– SPICE Output
Identify Port Type &Identify Port Type &Identify Port Type &Identify Port Type &
Cross SectionCross SectionCross SectionCross Section
Assign Excitation &Assign Excitation &Assign Excitation &Assign Excitation &
Calibrate PortCalibrate PortCalibrate PortCalibrate Port
Define DefaultDefine DefaultDefine DefaultDefine Default
Post ProcessingPost ProcessingPost ProcessingPost Processing

Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Is it Really that Simple?
– Yes, but the geometric model was setup with several considerations
1.Only the face of the coax dielectric was selected for the port face
– Port Boundary conditions define outer conductor
– Material Definitions define inner conductor
2.Uniform port cross-section
– Only supports a single mode
– Higher-order modes caused by reflections would attenuate before port
• Modes attenuate as a function of e-ααααz, assuming propagation in the z-direction.
• Required distance (uniform port length) depends on modes propagation constant.
Uniform crossUniform crossUniform crossUniform cross----sectionsectionsectionsection
Rule of Thumb: 5xRule of Thumb: 5xRule of Thumb: 5xRule of Thumb: 5x
Critical DistanceCritical DistanceCritical DistanceCritical Distance

Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• How often is the Setup that Simple?
– If you are emulating laboratory measurements? [Case 1 ]
• Most of the time!
– Laboratory equipment does not directly connect to arbitrary transmission
lines
• Exceptions
– Emulating Complex Probes with a Port Understanding of Probe
– If you are isolating part of a structure? [Case 2 ]
• For “real” designs - usually only by dumb luck!
– User Must Understand and/or Implement Correctly:
1.Port Boundary conditions and impact of boundary condition
2.Fields within the structure
3.Assumptions made by port solver
4.Return path

Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Side Note: Problems Associated with Correlating Results [Case 2]
– Can be broken into two categories of problems
1.Complex Structure
– BGA, Backplane, Antenna Feed, Waveguide “Plumbing”, etc
– Most common problems result from
• Measurement setup – Test fixtures, deembedding, etc.
• Failing to understand the fields in the structure Boundary Problem
• Return path problems – Model truncation
2.Simple Structures
– Uniform transmission lines
• Equations or Circuit Elements
– Most common problems result from
• Improper use of default or excitation boundary conditions
• Failure to understand the assumptions used by “correct” results
(Equations or Circuit Elements)

Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Why are they critical?
– Any current injected into a system must return to the source
• DC
– Chooses path of least resistance
• AC
– Chooses path of least inductance
– A signal propagates between the signal trace and its reference plane
– Reference plane is just as important as signal trace!
• Why do I care?
– Many real designs have nonideal return paths
• These effects are only captured by full-wave simulators
– Isolating parts of a structure
• Failure to maintain the correct return path will
– Limit correlation to measurements
– Mask or create design problems
• Port and Boundary setup is the most common source of error in model setup

Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Port1Port1Port1Port1
No DCNo DCNo DCNo DC
Return PathReturn PathReturn PathReturn Path
No Return Path

Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
DCDCDCDC
DC Return Path

Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
DC & RFDC & RFDC & RFDC & RF
S21S21S21S21
S11S11S11S11
S31S31S31S31
DC/AC Return Path

Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Isolate part of structure - Case 2
– Isolate Transition
• Deembed
• Recombine using Ansoft Designer - Circuit
Wave PortWave PortWave PortWave Port

Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft DesignerAnsoft DesignerAnsoft DesignerAnsoft Designer ---- CircuitCircuitCircuitCircuit

Introduction
1-32
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Introduction
1-33
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• What went wrong?
– Isolate Port from Discontinuity?
• Yes
– Uniform Cross-Section?
• NO – The cross section of the port (including its boundaries) is not maintained
– Maintain Return Path?
• NO – Boundary on port shorts the planes together at edges
– Identical to placing vias at port edge!
– All Modes Accounted for?
• NO – Did not consider Parallel Plate mode
– Even if we did, the via (port edge) cuts off mode Reason vias are used!

Introduction
1-34
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
StriplineStriplineStriplineStripline
ParallelParallelParallelParallel
PlatePlatePlatePlate
Ansoft DesignerAnsoft DesignerAnsoft DesignerAnsoft Designer ---- CircuitCircuitCircuitCircuit
Wave PortWave PortWave PortWave Port
2 Terminals2 Terminals2 Terminals2 Terminals

Introduction
1-35
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Port InfluencesPort InfluencesPort InfluencesPort Influences
Lumped PortLumped PortLumped PortLumped Port

Introduction
1-36
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Introduction
1-37
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
TOP
T1T2
T3
Power
GND
BOTTOM
G
P
SIDE
Power
GND
Signal
Lumped Gap Port
Terminal Line

Introduction
1-38
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped Gap Port

Introduction
1-39
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-39
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Differential Lumped Gap PortsDifferential Lumped Gap PortsDifferential Lumped Gap PortsDifferential Lumped Gap Ports

Introduction
1-40
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
3-40
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
GGGG SSSS GGGG
PortPortPortPort

1-1
February 23, 2009
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Chapter 4 – Appendix:
Boundary Conditions

Introduction
1-2
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations and Boundary Conditions
• Majority of HFSS errors are related to improper usage of excitations and boundary conditions
• Boundary conditions are important because they significantly impact electromagnetic solution
• Determine model scope
– To truncate infinite space to finite volume, HFSS applies PEC boundary to surface surrounding
geometric model
• Can reduce model complexity
– Boundary conditions can be used to reduce solution time and computing resource demands
Perfect E
Symmetry Plane
Perfect H
Symmetry Plane
TE10 Cavity
Resonator Pyramidal
Horn
Antenna

Introduction
1-3
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Surface approximations
– Perfect E surface
– Perfect H surface
– Finite conductivity surface
– Impedance surface
– Layered impedance
– Lumped RLC boundary
– Symmetry planes
– Radiation (absorbing) boundary surface
– Perfectly matched layer (PML)
• Strictly not boundary condition, but effectively behaves like one
– Master/slave (linked or periodic) boundaries
– Screening impedance
• Excitations
– Wave ports (external)
– Lumped ports (internal)
User-Defined Boundary Conditions
0=⋅∇
=⋅∇
∂
∂
+=×∇
∂
∂
−=×∇
B
D
t
D
JH
t
B
E
ρ

Introduction
1-4
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Perfect E and Perfect H Boundaries
• Perfect E is perfect electrical conductor (PEC)
– Forces E-field perpendicular to surface
– Represents metal surfaces, ground planes, ideal cavity walls, etc.
– Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite ground plane in post-processing radiated fields
• Perfect H is perfect magnetic conductor (PMC)
– Forces H-field perpendicular to surface and E-field tangential
– Does not exist in real world
– Useful boundary constraint for electromagnetic models
– Represents openings in metal surfaces, etc.
• Parameters
– None
Perfect E Boundary Perfect H Boundary
When you define a solid object as a
‘perf_conductor,’ a Perfect E boundary
condition is applied to its exterior surfaces.
E-field Parallel to surface
E-field Perpendicular to surface

Introduction
1-5
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• All methods utilize an equivalent surface impedance applied to the field as it travels across
the surface
Zs,input
Zs,Au
LAu
Zs,Ni
LNi
Zs,Cu
LCu
Zs,input
Zs,Au
LAu
Zs,Ni
LNi
Zs,Cu
LCu
Four Surface Loss Modeling Methods
σδ
j
Zs
+
=
1
ωσµ
δ
2
=
Zs specified as ΩΩΩΩ/sq
0.7mil Copper
500 µin Nickel 500 µin Gold
0.7mil Copper
500 µin Nickel 500 µin Gold
Finite Conductivity Impedance
Layered Impedance Lumped RLC
Parallel RLC Circuit
t >> δδδδ

Introduction
1-6
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Finite Conductivity Boundary
• Lossy electrical conductor
– Forces E-field perpendicular to surface
– Surface impedance includes resistive and reactive surface losses
• Used for non-ideal conductor analysis
• Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite ground plane in post-
processing radiated fields
• Parameters
– Conductivity (S/m)
– Relative permeability (unitless)
When you define a solid object as a non-
ideal metal (e.g. copper or aluminum), and it
is set to ‘Solve Surface’, a finite conductivity
boundary is applied to its exterior faces.
ωσµ
δ
2
=
σδ
j
Zs
+
=
1
Surface ImpedanceSkin Depth Field Relationship
t >> δδδδ
Good conductor in
skin depth regime

Introduction
1-7
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Impedance Boundary
• User-defined surface impedance
– Represents thin film resistors or reactive loads
• Infinite ground plane option simulates effects of infinite surface in post-processing
radiated fields
• Calculate required impedance from desired lumped value, width, and length
– Length (in direction of current flow) ÷ width = number of “squares”
– Impedance per square = desired lumped impedance ÷ number of squares
• Parameters:
– Resistance (Ω/square)
– Reactance (Ω/square)
Example: Resistor in Wilkinson Power Divider
Resistor is 3.5 mils long (in direction of flow) and
4 mils wide. Desired lumped value is 35 ΩΩΩΩ.
square
N
R
R
N
lumped
sheet /40
875.0
35
875.0
4
5.3
Ω===
==

Introduction
1-8
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Layered Impedance Boundary
• Models multiple thin layers in a structure as single impedance surface
– Effect is same as impedance boundary, except that HFSS calculates surface impedance based on
data entered for layered structure
– Surface roughness can be included
– Plating layers can be modeled by using an equivalent surface impedance
• Not available for fast frequency sweeps
• Parameters
– Layer thicknesses
– Material properties
– Surface roughness (optional)
0.7mil Copper
500 µµµµin Nickel 500 µµµµin Gold Zs,input
Zs,Au
LAu
Zs,Ni
LNi
Zs,Cu
LCu
Impedance of the layered structure is calculated by
recursively calling the impedance calculation
formulation from transmission line theory

Introduction
1-9
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped RLC Boundary
• Represents any combination of parallel-connected lumped RLC elements on surfaces
in terms of circuit definition
– Supply values for R, L, and C
– HFSS determines impedance per square of lumped RLC boundary at any frequency
• Fast frequency sweeps are supported
• Parameters
– Resistance
– Inductance
– Capacitance
– Line for current flow

Introduction
1-10
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Allows for modeling portion of entire structure
• For Driven Modal solutions
• Two symmetry options are available
– Use perfect E when electric field is perpendicular to symmetry plane
– Use perfect H when electric field is tangential to symmetry plane
• Involve further implications to boundary manager and fields post-processing
– May need to specify impedance multiplier
– Existence of symmetry boundary allows for near- and far-field calculation of entire structure
• Parameters
– Type
– Impedance multiplier
Symmetry Plane
Conductive edges on
all four sides
Waveguide contains symmetric propagating
mode which could be modeled using half the
volume vertically or horizontally.
Perfect E Symmetry
(bottom)
Perfect H Symmetry
(left side)

Introduction
1-11
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• When symmetry is used, Zpi and impedance line-dependent Zpv and Zvi calculations
will be incorrect since entire port aperture is not represented
– Impedance is halved for model with Perfect E symmetry plane
– Impedance is doubled for model with Perfect H symmetry plane
• Port impedance multiplier is renormalizing factor used to obtain correct impedance
– Value applied to all ports
– Global parameter set during assignment of any port
Symmetry Plane Impedance Multiplier
Rectangular WG
(No Symmetry)
Half Rectangular WG
(Perfect E Symmetry)
Impedance Multiplier = 2
Half Rectangular WG
(Perfect H Symmetry)
Impedance Multiplier = 0.5

Introduction
1-12
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Perfect E Symmetry (top)
Perfect H Symmetry
(right side)
TE20 mode in full model
Properly represented
with Perfect E symmetry
Mode cannot occur
with Perfect H
symmetry
Symmetry Plane Mode Implications
• Geometric symmetry does not necessarily imply field symmetry for higher-order
modes
• Symmetry boundaries can act as mode filters
– Next higher propagating waveguide mode is not symmetric about vertical center plane of waveguide
– Therefore one symmetry case is valid while the other is not
• Use caution when using symmetry planes to assure that real behavior is not filtered
out by boundary conditions

Introduction
1-13
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Radiation Boundary
• Mimics continued propagation beyond boundary plane
– Absorption achieved via 2nd order radiation boundary
– Place at least λ/4 from strongly radiating structure
– Place at least λ/10 from weakly radiating structure
– Absorbs best when incident energy flow is normal to surface
– Must be concave to all incident fields from within modeled space
• Parameters
– Advanced options used for incident wave and HFSS DataLink problems
Boundary is λ/4 away from
horn aperture in all directions
Radiation boundary functions
well for incident angles less
than 25°-30°

Introduction
1-14
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Fictitious lossy anisotropic material which fully absorbs electromagnetic fields
• Two types of PML applications
– “PML objects accept free radiation” if PML terminates free space
– “PML objects continue guided waves” if PML terminates transmission line
• Guidelines for assigning PML boundaries
– Use PML setup wizard for most cases
– Manually create a PML when base object is curved or inhomogeneous
• Parameters
– Uniform thickness
– Minimum frequency
– Minimum radiating distance (between PML and antenna)
Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)
PML functions well for
incident angles less
than 65°-70°

Introduction
1-15
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Radiation Boundary vs PML
Radiation Boundary PML
Type 2D 3D
(occupies volume)
Incident angle from normal < ~30° < ~70°
Distance from radiator > λ/4 > λ/10
Setup complexity Low Medium

Introduction
1-16
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Master/Slave Boundaries
• Used to model unit cell of periodic structure
– Also referred to as linked or periodic boundaries
• Master and slave boundaries are always paired
– Fields on master surface are mapped to slave surface with a phase shift
– Phase shift specified either as absolute phase value or using scan angle
• Constraints
– Master and slave surfaces must be identical in shape and size
– Coordinate systems must be created to identify point-to-point
correspondence
• Parameters
– Master/slave pairing
– UV coordinate systems
– Phase shift method
Unit Cell Model of Waveguide Array
WG Port
(bottom)
Ground Plane
PML (top)
Master
Boundary
Slave
Boundary
V-
axis
U-axis

Introduction
1-17
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Screening Impedance Boundary
• Used to efficiently represent periodic screens or grids with impedance boundary
condition
– Can be anisotropic (different values in x and y directions)
– Can be frequency-dependent
• Periodic grid characterized by unit cell
– Dynamic link support to import impedance values from unit cell
– Includes effects of polarization
• Parameters
– Resistance and reactance (Ω/square)
– Coordinate system if anisotropic
– HFSS design for dynamic link

Introduction
1-18
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Default Outer Boundary
• Any exterior face of modeled geometry not given user-defined boundary condition is
assumed to be Perfect E boundary
– Default boundary called “outer”
• Imagine entire model buried in solid metal unless HFSS is instructed otherwise
• Use HFSS →→→→ Boundary Display to view all boundary assignments
– Graphical window shows both user and auto-assigned boundaries

Introduction
1-19
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Excitations
• Provide means for energy to enter and exit model
• Types of excitations
– Ports
• Wave ports
• Lumped ports
• Floquet ports
– Voltage sources
– Current sources
– Magnetic biases
– Incident waves
• Plane waves
• Hertzian dipole
• Cylindrical wave
• Gaussian beam
• Linear antenna wave
• Far-field wave
• Near-field wave
• Only ports provide S-parameters
– This presentation will focus on this type of excitation

Introduction
1-20
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Driven Modal vs Driven Terminal Solutions
• Driven modal
– S-matrix solution expressed in terms of incident and reflected powers of waveguide modes
– Always used by wave solver
– Integration lines set phase between ports and modal voltage integration path (Zpv and Zvi)
– Use for modal-based S-parameters of passive, high-frequency structures such as microstrips,
waveguides, and transmission lines
• Driven terminal
– S-matrix solution expressed in terms of linear combination of nodal voltages and currents for wave
port
– Equivalent “modes-to-nodes” transformation performed from modal solution
– Use for terminal-based S-parameters of multi-conductor transmission line ports (with several quasi-
TEM modes, etc.)

Introduction
1-21
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ports
• Ports are unique type of boundary condition
– Allow energy to flow into and out of structure
– Defined on 2D planar surface
– 2D field patterns serve as boundary conditions for full 3D problem
• Incorrect port setup will produce incorrect results
– If port fields are incorrect, then solution will be incorrect
– Assumed boundary condition on port edges should always be considered
Initial
Mesh
Seeding and
Lambda Refinement
(Single Frequency)
Port Solution
(Adaptive)
Full
Volumetric
Solution

Introduction
1-22
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• External port type
• Arbitrary port solver calculates natural waveguide field patterns (modes)
– Assumes semi-infinitely long waveguide with same cross-section and material properties as port
surface
• Recommended only for surfaces exposed to background object
• Supports multiple modes, de-embedding, and re-normalization
• Computes generalized S-parameters
– Frequency-dependent characteristic impedance
– Perfectly matched at every frequency
Wave Ports

Introduction
1-23
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Port Solver
• Wave port solver solves two-dimensional wave equation
• Field pattern of traveling wave inside waveguide can be determined by solving
Maxwell’s equations
• Wave equation is derived directly from Maxwell’s equations
• where
– E(x,y) is phasor representing oscillating electric field
– k0 is free space wave number
– µr is complex relative permeability
– εr is complex relative permittivity
• 2D solver obtains excitation field pattern in form of phasor solution E(x,y)
– Phasor solutions are independent of z and time
– Only after being multiplied by e-γz do they become traveling waves
– Different excitation field pattern is computed for each frequency point of interest
( ) 0),(,
1 2
0 =−





×∇×∇ yxEkyxE r
r
ε
µ

Introduction
1-24
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Boundary Conditions
• All outer edges are assigned Perfect E boundary by default
– Port is defined within waveguide
– Simple setup for enclosed transmission lines (coax, waveguide, etc.)
– Challenging setup for unbalanced or non-enclosed lines (microstrip, CPW, slotline, etc.)
• Symmetry or impedance boundaries also recognized at port edges
• For port on same surface as radiation boundary, default interface is Perfect E
boundary
– Can set option to use radiation boundary on port edges during port solution
• Creating port edges too close to current-carrying lines will allow coupling from trace to
port walls
– Causes incorrect modal solution which will suffer immediate discontinuity as energy is injected past
port into model
Port too narrow
(fields coupled to sidewalls)
Correct port size

Introduction
1-25
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Sizing Guidelines
• Microstrip port height between 6h and
10h
– Tend towards upper limit as dielectric
constant drops and fringing fields increase
– Make bottom edge of port co-planar with
upper face of ground plane
• Microstrip port width
– 10w for w ≥ h
– 5w, or on order of 3h to 4h, for w < h
• Extend stripline port height from upper
to lower groundplane (h)
• Stripline port width
– 8w for w ≥ h
– 5w, or on order of 3h to 4h, for w < h
• Can also make side walls of port Perfect
H boundaries
w
h
6h to
10h
10w, w ≥≥≥≥ h
or
5w (3h to 4h), w < h
Port sizing guidelines are not inviolable rules. If meeting height
and width requirements result in rectangular aperture larger than
λ/2 in one dimension, the substrate and trace may be ignored in
favor of a waveguide mode. When in doubt, run a ports-only
solution to determine which modes are propagating.
w
h
8w, w ≥≥≥≥ h
or
5w (3h to 4h), w < h

Introduction
1-26
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Port Sizing Guidelines
• Slotline port height at least 4h or 4g
(whichever is larger)
– Include air above and below substrate
– If ground plane is present, port should
terminate at ground plane
• Port width should contain at least 3g to
either side of slot or 7g total minimum
– Port boundary must intersect both side
ground planes or they will ‘float’ and become
signal conductors
• Coplanar waveguide port height at least
4h or 4g (whichever is larger)
– Include air above and below substrate
– If ground plane is present, port should
terminate at ground plane
• Port width should contain 3-5g or 3-5s of
side grounds (whichever is larger)
– Total width ~10g or ~10s
– Port outline must intersect both side grounds
or they will ‘float’ and become signal
conductors
g
Approx 7g minimum
h
Larger of 4h or 4g
For Driven Modal solutions, use
Zpv for impedance calculation
Larger of approx. 10g or 10s
s
h
Larger of 4h or 4g
g

Introduction
1-27
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Uniform crossUniform crossUniform crossUniform cross----sectionsectionsectionsection
added for each wave portadded for each wave portadded for each wave portadded for each wave port
Wave Port Implications
• Modes, reflections, and propagation
– It is possible for 3D field solution generated by excitation signal of one specific mode to contain
reflections of higher-order modes which arise due to discontinuities
– If higher-order mode is reflected back to excitation port or transmitted onto another port, its S-
parameters should be calculated
– If higher-order mode decays before reaching any port (because of attenuation or because it is a non-
propagating evanescent mode), there is no need to obtain its S-parameters
• Wave ports require a length of uniform cross-section
– HFSS assumes that each port is connected to semi-infinitely long waveguide with same cross-section
as wave port
No uniform cross sectionNo uniform cross sectionNo uniform cross sectionNo uniform cross section
at wave portsat wave portsat wave portsat wave ports

Introduction
1-28
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
• Wave ports can be placed internal to model by providing boundary condition normally
seen by external wave port
– Create PEC “cap” to back the wave port and enable excitation in proper direction
Example coax feed within solution volume
Coaxial antenna feed
with coaxial wave port
capped by PEC object
Internal Wave Ports

Introduction
1-29
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Integration Lines
• Applicable to driven modal solution types
• Port vector which can serve several purposes
• Calibration line which specifies direction of excitation electric field pattern at port
– Define separate integration line for each mode on multi-mode ports
• Impedance line along which to compute Zpv or Zvi port impedance
– Select two points with maximum voltage differential
Microstrip line
Waveguide
Slotline

Introduction
1-30
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Lumped Ports
• Recommended only for surfaces internal to model
– Single TEM mode with no de-embedding
– Uniform electric field on port surface
– Normalized to constant user-defined Z0
• Lumped port boundary conditions
– Perfect E or finite conductivity boundary for port edges which interface
with conductor or another port edge
– Perfect H for all remaining port edges
Uniform electric field
User-defined Zo
Zo
Dipole element
with lumped port

Introduction
1-31
February 23, 2009
Inventory #002593
4-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Wave Ports vs Lumped Ports
Wave port Lumped port
Accessibility External Faces Internal to Model
Higher order modes Yes No
De-embedding Yes No
Re-normalization Yes Yes
Setup complexity Moderate Low

Training Manual
5.1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – UHF Probe
The Ultra-High Frequency (UHF) Probe
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and analyze a
UHF probe, using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
5.1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft HFSS Design Environment
The following features of the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment are used to
create this passive device model
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Cylinders, BoxesCylinders, BoxesCylinders, BoxesCylinders, Boxes
Boolean Operations: Unite, SubtractUnite, SubtractUnite, SubtractUnite, Subtract
Boundaries/Excitations
Ports: Wave PortsWave PortsWave PortsWave Ports
Analysis
Sweep: Fast Frequency: Fast Frequency: Fast Frequency: Fast Frequency
Results
Cartesian plottingCartesian plottingCartesian plottingCartesian plotting
Field Overlays:
3D Far Field Plots3D Far Field Plots3D Far Field Plots3D Far Field Plots

Training Manual
5.1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
Launching Ansoft HFSSLaunching Ansoft HFSSLaunching Ansoft HFSSLaunching Ansoft HFSS
1. To access Ansoft HFSS, click the Microsoft StartStartStartStart button, select ProgramsProgramsProgramsPrograms, and select
the Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11.
Setting Tool OptionsSetting Tool OptionsSetting Tool OptionsSetting Tool Options
To set the tool options:To set the tool options:To set the tool options:To set the tool options:
Note:Note:Note:Note: In order to follow the steps outlined in this example, verify that the
following tool options are set ::::
1. Select the menu item Tools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS Options
2. HFSS Options Window:
1. Click the GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral tab
Use Wizards for data input when creating new boundaries::::
CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Duplicate boundaries with geometry:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
2. Click the OKOKOKOK button
3. Select the menu item Tools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler Options.
4. Modeler Options Window:
1. Click the OperationOperationOperationOperation tab
Automatically cover closed polylines:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
2. Click the DrawingDrawingDrawingDrawing tab
Edit property of new primitives:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Opening a New ProjectOpening a New ProjectOpening a New ProjectOpening a New Project
To open a new project:To open a new project:To open a new project:To open a new project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, click the On the Standard toolbar, or select
the menu item File > NewFile > NewFile > NewFile > New.
2. From the ProjectProjectProjectProject menu, select Insert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS Design....
Set Solution TypeSet Solution TypeSet Solution TypeSet Solution Type
To set the solution type:To set the solution type:To set the solution type:To set the solution type:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution Type
1. Choose Driven TerminalDriven TerminalDriven TerminalDriven Terminal

Training Manual
5.1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating the 3D Model
Set Model UnitsSet Model UnitsSet Model UnitsSet Model Units
To set the units:To set the units:To set the units:To set the units:
1. Select the menu item Modeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > Units
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: in (inches)in (inches)in (inches)in (inches)
Set Default MaterialSet Default MaterialSet Default MaterialSet Default Material
To set the default material:To set the default material:To set the default material:To set the default material:
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose SelectSelectSelectSelect
2. Select Definition Window:
1. Type coppercoppercoppercopper in the Search by NameSearch by NameSearch by NameSearch by Name field

Training Manual
5.1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating Annular RingsCreating Annular RingsCreating Annular RingsCreating Annular Rings
Creating a ring is accomplished by creating a cylinder that represents the outer
radius and a cylinder that represents the inner radius. By performing a Boolean
subtraction, the resulting geometry is a ring.
For this model, two sets of rings are necessary. Instead of manually creating
both rings, we will create one ring, copy it, and edit the dimensions of the copy.
Create Ring 1Create Ring 1Create Ring 1Create Ring 1
1. Select the menu item Draw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > Cylinder
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the cylinder position
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius:
dX: 0.310.310.310.31, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height:
To set the name:To set the name:To set the name:To set the name:
1. Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window.
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ring_innerring_innerring_innerring_inner
To fit the view:To fit the view:To fit the view:To fit the view:
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View.... Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D
key

Training Manual
5.1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)
Create Ring 1 (Continued)Create Ring 1 (Continued)Create Ring 1 (Continued)Create Ring 1 (Continued)
dX: 0.370.370.370.37, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ring_1ring_1ring_1ring_1
To select objects to be subtracted:To select objects to be subtracted:To select objects to be subtracted:To select objects to be subtracted:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By Name
2. Select Object Dialog,
1. Select the objects named: ring_1, ring_innerring_1, ring_innerring_1, ring_innerring_1, ring_inner
To subtract:To subtract:To subtract:To subtract:
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > Subtract
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: ring_1ring_1ring_1ring_1
Tool Parts: ring_innerring_innerring_innerring_inner
Clone tool objects before subtract: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
Click the OKOKOKOK button

Training Manual
5.1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)Creating Annular Rings (Continued)
Create Ring 2Create Ring 2Create Ring 2Create Ring 2
1. Select the objects named: ring_1ring_1ring_1ring_1
3. Select the menu item Edit > CopyEdit > CopyEdit > CopyEdit > Copy
4. Select the menu item Edit > PasteEdit > PasteEdit > PasteEdit > Paste
Change the dimensions of Ring 2Change the dimensions of Ring 2Change the dimensions of Ring 2Change the dimensions of Ring 2
1. To change the dimensions of ring_2, expand the model tree as shown
below. It should be noted that order of the editing is important. If you make
the inner radius > then the outer radius, a invalid object will result and it will
be removed from the model.
2. Using the mouse, double click the left mouse button on the CreateCylinderCreateCylinderCreateCylinderCreateCylinder
command for ring_2ring_2ring_2ring_2
3. Properties dialog
1. Change the radius to: 0.5 in0.5 in0.5 in0.5 in
4. Using the mouse, double click the left mouse button on the CreateCylinderCreateCylinderCreateCylinderCreateCylinder
command for the ring_inner1ring_inner1ring_inner1ring_inner1
5. Properties dialog
1. Change the radius to: 0.435 in0.435 in0.435 in0.435 in

Training Manual
5.1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Arm_1Create Arm_1Create Arm_1Create Arm_1
To create Arm_1To create Arm_1To create Arm_1To create Arm_1
1. Select the menu item Draw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > Box
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the box position
X: ----0.10.10.10.1, Y: ----0.310.310.310.31, Z: 5.05.05.05.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the base
rectangle:
dX: 0.20.20.20.2, dY: ----4.694.694.694.69, dZ: ----0.0650.0650.0650.065, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View.... Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D
key.
Group ConductorsGroup ConductorsGroup ConductorsGroup Conductors
To group the conductors:To group the conductors:To group the conductors:To group the conductors:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible.... Or press the CTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+A key
2. Select the menu item, Modeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > Unite

Training Manual
5.1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Center pinCreate the Center pinCreate the Center pinCreate the Center pin
To create the center pinTo create the center pinTo create the center pinTo create the center pin
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: center_pincenter_pincenter_pincenter_pin

Training Manual
5.1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Arm_2Create Arm_2Create Arm_2Create Arm_2
To create Arm_2To create Arm_2To create Arm_2To create Arm_2
X: ----0.10.10.10.1, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 5.15.15.15.1, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
dX: 0.20.20.20.2, dY: 5.05.05.05.0, dZ: ----0.0650.0650.0650.065, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Arm_2Arm_2Arm_2Arm_2
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View....

Training Manual
5.1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Grounding PinCreate the Grounding PinCreate the Grounding PinCreate the Grounding Pin
To create the grounding pinTo create the grounding pinTo create the grounding pinTo create the grounding pin
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 1.01.01.01.0, Z: 0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: pinpinpinpin
1. Select the objects named: Arm_2, center_pin, pinArm_2, center_pin, pinArm_2, center_pin, pinArm_2, center_pin, pin
Note:Note:Note:Note: Use the Ctrl + Left mouse button to select multiple
objects

Training Manual
5.1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Wave portCreate the Wave portCreate the Wave portCreate the Wave port
To create a circle that represents the port:To create a circle that represents the port:To create a circle that represents the port:To create a circle that represents the port:
1. Select the menu item Draw > CircleDraw > CircleDraw > CircleDraw > Circle
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center position
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius of the circle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: p1p1p1p1

Training Manual
5.1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum
Create AirCreate AirCreate AirCreate Air
To create AirTo create AirTo create AirTo create Air
X: ----5.05.05.05.0, Y: ----10.010.010.010.0, Z: 0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: AirAirAirAir
3. Set the Display WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay Wireframe option to CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
To deselect all objects:To deselect all objects:To deselect all objects:To deselect all objects:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All....
Create Radiation BoundaryCreate Radiation BoundaryCreate Radiation BoundaryCreate Radiation Boundary
To create a radiation boundaryTo create a radiation boundaryTo create a radiation boundaryTo create a radiation boundary
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > Faces
2. While holding the CTRLCTRLCTRLCTRL key, select all of the faces of the AirAirAirAir vacuum
object exceptexceptexceptexcept the face on the XY plane. Use the rotate button in between
selections to access the back side faces.
3. Once the 5 faces are selected, go to the menu item HFSS > BoundariesHFSS > BoundariesHFSS > BoundariesHFSS > Boundaries
>Assign> Radiation>Assign> Radiation>Assign> Radiation>Assign> Radiation
4. Radiation Boundary window
1. Name: Rad1Rad1Rad1Rad1

Training Manual
5.1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Wave Port Excitation 1 (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation 1 (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation 1 (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation 1 (Continued)
To select the object p1:To select the object p1:To select the object p1:To select the object p1:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select > ObjectsEdit > Select > ObjectsEdit > Select > ObjectsEdit > Select > Objects
1. Select the objects named: p1p1p1p1
To assign wave port excitationTo assign wave port excitationTo assign wave port excitationTo assign wave port excitation
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Wave Port
2. Place Arm_2Arm_2Arm_2Arm_2 in the Conducting ObjectConducting ObjectConducting ObjectConducting Object list and Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1 in the ReferenceReferenceReferenceReference
ConductorConductorConductorConductor list
Rename the Wave Port and TerminalRename the Wave Port and TerminalRename the Wave Port and TerminalRename the Wave Port and Terminal
1. Double click on WavePort1WavePort1WavePort1WavePort1 under ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations in the project tree.
2. Rename the port to p1p1p1p1
4. Double click on the terminal named Arm_2_T1Arm_2_T1Arm_2_T1Arm_2_T1
5. Rename the terminal to T1T1T1T1

Training Manual
5.1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Infinite Ground PlaneCreate Infinite Ground PlaneCreate Infinite Ground PlaneCreate Infinite Ground Plane
To create an Infinite groundTo create an Infinite groundTo create an Infinite groundTo create an Infinite ground
2. Graphically select the face of the Air object at Z=0
3. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Finite ConductivityHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Finite ConductivityHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Finite ConductivityHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Finite Conductivity
4. Finite Conductivity Boundary window
1. Name: gnd_planegnd_planegnd_planegnd_plane
2. Use Material: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
3. Click the vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum button
1. Type coppercoppercoppercopper in the SearchSearchSearchSearch
by Nameby Nameby Nameby Name field
5. Infinite Ground Plane: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Create a Radiation SetupCreate a Radiation SetupCreate a Radiation SetupCreate a Radiation Setup
To define the radiation setupTo define the radiation setupTo define the radiation setupTo define the radiation setup
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Radiation > Insert Far Field Setup > InfiniteHFSS > Radiation > Insert Far Field Setup > InfiniteHFSS > Radiation > Insert Far Field Setup > InfiniteHFSS > Radiation > Insert Far Field Setup > Infinite
SphereSphereSphereSphere
2. Far Field Radiation Sphere Setup dialog
1.1.1.1. Infinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite Sphere Tab
1. Name: ff_2dff_2dff_2dff_2d
2. Phi: (Start: 0,0,0,0, Stop: 90,90,90,90, Step Size: 90)90)90)90)
3. Theta: (Start: ----180,180,180,180, Stop: 180,180,180,180, Step Size: 2)2)2)2)

Training Manual
5.1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Add Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation Boundary
Far fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiation surface. Totion surface. Totion surface. Totion surface. To
obtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integration surface should besurface should besurface should besurface should be
forced to have aforced to have aforced to have aforced to have a λλλλ/6 to/6 to/6 to/6 to λλλλ/8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length.
To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:
Switch back to object selection by selecting the menu item Edit > SelectEdit > SelectEdit > SelectEdit > Select
ObjectsObjectsObjectsObjects
Select the AirAirAirAir object by left clicking it in the drawing window
While the AirAirAirAir object is selected, move the mouse to the project tree and
right click on Mesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh Operations >>>> AssignAssignAssignAssign >>>> On SelectionOn SelectionOn SelectionOn Selection >>>> Length BasedLength BasedLength BasedLength Based
Name: LengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiation
Maximum Length of Elements: 3.5in3.5in3.5in3.5in (this is about λλλλ/6/6/6/6 at 0.55GHz0.55GHz0.55GHz0.55GHz)

Training Manual
5.1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Creating an Analysis SetupCreating an Analysis SetupCreating an Analysis SetupCreating an Analysis Setup
To create an analysis setup:To create an analysis setup:To create an analysis setup:To create an analysis setup:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
2. Solution Setup Window:
1. Click the GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral tab::::
Solution Frequency: 0.55 GHz: 0.55 GHz: 0.55 GHz: 0.55 GHz
Maximum Number of Passes: 10101010
Maximum Delta S per Pass: 0.020.020.020.02
2. Click the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab:
Enable Iterative Solver: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
3. Maximum Click the OKOKOKOK button
Adding a Frequency SweepAdding a Frequency SweepAdding a Frequency SweepAdding a Frequency Sweep
To add a frequency sweep:To add a frequency sweep:To add a frequency sweep:To add a frequency sweep:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Frequency Sweep
1. Select Solution Setup: Setup1Setup1Setup1Setup1
2. Edit Sweep Window:
1. Sweep Type: Fast: Fast: Fast: Fast
2. Frequency Setup Type: Linear Count: Linear Count: Linear Count: Linear Count
Start: 0.35GHz0.35GHz0.35GHz0.35GHz
Stop: 0.75GHz: 0.75GHz: 0.75GHz: 0.75GHz
Count: 401: 401: 401: 401
Save Fields: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Save ProjectSave ProjectSave ProjectSave Project
To save the project:To save the project:To save the project:To save the project:
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save As.
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_uhf_probehfss_uhf_probehfss_uhf_probehfss_uhf_probe
3. Click the SaveSaveSaveSave button
Model ValidationModel ValidationModel ValidationModel Validation
To validate the model:To validate the model:To validate the model:To validate the model:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Validation CheckHFSS > Validation CheckHFSS > Validation CheckHFSS > Validation Check
2. Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view any errors or warning messages, use the Message
Manager.
To start the solution process:To start the solution process:To start the solution process:To start the solution process:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze All

Training Manual
5.1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solution DataSolution DataSolution DataSolution Data
To view the Solution Data:To view the Solution Data:To view the Solution Data:To view the Solution Data:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution Data
To view the Profile:To view the Profile:To view the Profile:To view the Profile:
1. Click the ProfileProfileProfileProfile Tab.
To view the Convergence:To view the Convergence:To view the Convergence:To view the Convergence:
1. Click the ConvergenceConvergenceConvergenceConvergence Tab
Note:Note:Note:Note: The default view is for convergence is TableTableTableTable. Select
the PlotPlotPlotPlot radio button to view a graphical representations of
the convergence data.
To view the Matrix Data:To view the Matrix Data:To view the Matrix Data:To view the Matrix Data:
1. Click the Matrix DataMatrix DataMatrix DataMatrix Data Tab
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view a real-time update of the Matrix Data, set the
Simulation to Setup1, Last AdaptiveSetup1, Last AdaptiveSetup1, Last AdaptiveSetup1, Last Adaptive
To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:
1. Click the Mesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh Statistics Tab.

Training Manual
5.1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot ---- MagnitudeMagnitudeMagnitudeMagnitude
To create a report:To create a report:To create a report:To create a report:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data
Report > Rectangular PlotReport > Rectangular PlotReport > Rectangular PlotReport > Rectangular Plot
2. Traces Window::::
1. Solution: Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1
2. Domain: SweepSweepSweepSweep
3. Category: Terminal S ParameterTerminal S ParameterTerminal S ParameterTerminal S Parameter
4. Quantity: St(T1,T1)St(T1,T1)St(T1,T1)St(T1,T1)
5. Function: dBdBdBdB
6. Click the New ReportNew ReportNew ReportNew Report button
Change the xChange the xChange the xChange the x----axis label settings:axis label settings:axis label settings:axis label settings:
1. Double click on the numbers on the plot’s x-axis to bring up the properties
window
2. Change the Number FormatNumber FormatNumber FormatNumber Format from AutoAutoAutoAuto to DecimalDecimalDecimalDecimal
3. Change the Field PrecisionField PrecisionField PrecisionField Precision from 2222 to 0000

Training Manual
5.1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Far Field Overlays
Create Far Field OverlayCreate Far Field OverlayCreate Far Field OverlayCreate Far Field Overlay
To create a 2D polar far field plot :To create a 2D polar far field plot :To create a 2D polar far field plot :To create a 2D polar far field plot :
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >HFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >HFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >HFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >
Radiation PatternRadiation PatternRadiation PatternRadiation Pattern
1. Solution: Setup1: LastAdaptiveSetup1: LastAdaptiveSetup1: LastAdaptiveSetup1: LastAdaptive
2. Geometry: ff_2dff_2dff_2dff_2d
3. In the Trace tabTrace tabTrace tabTrace tab
1. Category: GainGainGainGain
2. Quantity: GainTotalGainTotalGainTotalGainTotal

Training Manual
5.2-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Conical Horn
Dual Mode Conical Horn
waveguide horn antenna using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
5.2-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
create this passive device model:
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: CylindersCylindersCylindersCylinders
Boolean: Union, Subtract, ConnectUnion, Subtract, ConnectUnion, Subtract, ConnectUnion, Subtract, Connect
Excitations: Wave PortsWave PortsWave PortsWave Ports
Boundaries: RadiationRadiationRadiationRadiation
Results
Plotting: Radiation PatternRadiation PatternRadiation PatternRadiation Pattern

Training Manual
5.2-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Port Size/TypePort Size/TypePort Size/TypePort Size/Type
Since the port is external to the model we could use a Wave Port. The size
of the port is determined by the physical dimensions of the waveguide.
Because the waveguide is circular, we must Polarize the E-Field for the
port definition.
Free SpaceFree SpaceFree SpaceFree Space
Since we are evaluating a radiating structure, we need to create a free
space environment for the device to operate in. This can be achieved by
using the Radiation Boundary condition or a Perfectly Matched Layer
(PML). We will use a Radiation Boundary since the surface will be
cylindrical.
The Radiation Boundary needs to be placed at least λ/4 from radiating
devices. For our example we will assume that ~λ/4 (0.6in)

Training Manual
5.2-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
1. To access Ansoft HFSS, click the Microsoft StartStartStartStart button, select ProgramsProgramsProgramsPrograms, and
select the Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11
Use Wizards for data entry when creating new boundaries::::
4. 3D Modeler Options Window:

Training Manual
5.2-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. In the Ansoft HFSS desktop, a new project is automatically inserted.
2. When a new project is automatically opened, a new HFSS Design is also
automatically inserted into the project.
1. Choose Driven ModalDriven ModalDriven ModalDriven Modal

Training Manual
5.2-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: inininin
Create Circular WaveguideCreate Circular WaveguideCreate Circular WaveguideCreate Circular Waveguide
Create waveguideCreate waveguideCreate waveguideCreate waveguide
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 0.8380.8380.8380.838, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: WaveguideWaveguideWaveguideWaveguide
Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D key

Training Manual
5.2-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Offset Coordinate SystemCreate Offset Coordinate SystemCreate Offset Coordinate SystemCreate Offset Coordinate System
Create CSCreate CSCreate CSCreate CS
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Coordinate System > Create > RelativeModeler > Coordinate System > Create > RelativeModeler > Coordinate System > Create > RelativeModeler > Coordinate System > Create > Relative
CS > OffsetCS > OffsetCS > OffsetCS > Offset
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the origin
Create Transition RegionCreate Transition RegionCreate Transition RegionCreate Transition Region
Create waveguide transitionCreate waveguide transitionCreate waveguide transitionCreate waveguide transition
1. Select the menu item Draw > ConeDraw > ConeDraw > ConeDraw > Cone
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the lower radius:
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the upper radius:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: TaperTaperTaperTaper

Training Manual
5.2-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the ThroatCreate the ThroatCreate the ThroatCreate the Throat
Create ThroatCreate ThroatCreate ThroatCreate Throat
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ThroatThroatThroatThroat

Training Manual
5.2-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group ObjectsGroup ObjectsGroup ObjectsGroup Objects
To group the objects:To group the objects:To group the objects:To group the objects:
Rename groupRename groupRename groupRename group
To rename the group of objects:To rename the group of objects:To rename the group of objects:To rename the group of objects:
1. From the ModelModelModelModel tree, select the only object shown
2. Click the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties button
1. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Horn_AirHorn_AirHorn_AirHorn_Air
3. Click the DoneDoneDoneDone button
Set Working Coordinate SystemSet Working Coordinate SystemSet Working Coordinate SystemSet Working Coordinate System
To set the working coordinate system:To set the working coordinate system:To set the working coordinate system:To set the working coordinate system:
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Coordinate System > Set Working CSModeler > Coordinate System > Set Working CSModeler > Coordinate System > Set Working CSModeler > Coordinate System > Set Working CS
2. Select Coordinate System Window,
1. From the list, select the CS: GlobalGlobalGlobalGlobal
2. Click the SelectSelectSelectSelect button
1. Type pecpecpecpec in the Search by NameSearch by NameSearch by NameSearch by Name field

Training Manual
5.2-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Horn WallCreate the Horn WallCreate the Horn WallCreate the Horn Wall
Create hornCreate hornCreate hornCreate horn
dX: 1.6471.6471.6471.647, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, dZ: 7.463: 7.463: 7.463: 7.463 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: HornHornHornHorn
Complete the HornComplete the HornComplete the HornComplete the Horn
To select the objectTo select the objectTo select the objectTo select the object
Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible.... Or press the CTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+A key
To complete the horn:To complete the horn:To complete the horn:To complete the horn:
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: HornHornHornHorn
Tool Parts: Horn_AirHorn_AirHorn_AirHorn_Air

Training Manual
5.2-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
1. Select the objects named: AirAirAirAir
3. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Radiation

Training Manual
5.2-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Y: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Z: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key

Training Manual
5.2-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Wave Port : General
1. Name: p1p1p1p1
2. Click the NextNextNextNext button
3. Wave Port : Modes
1. Number of Modes: 2222
2. For Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1, click the NoneNoneNoneNone under Integration LineIntegration LineIntegration LineIntegration Line column and select
New LineNew LineNew LineNew Line
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vector position
X:::: ----0.8380.8380.8380.838, Y: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Z: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vertex
5. Polarize E Field: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
4. Wave Port : Post Processing
5. Click the FinishFinishFinishFinish button

Training Manual
5.2-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Y: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Z: 7.463: 7.463: 7.463: 7.463 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Infinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite Sphere Tab
1.1.1.1. Coordinate SystemCoordinate SystemCoordinate SystemCoordinate System Tab
1. Select Use local coordinate systemUse local coordinate systemUse local coordinate systemUse local coordinate system
2. Choose RelativeCS3RelativeCS3RelativeCS3RelativeCS3

Training Manual
5.2-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_chornhfss_chornhfss_chornhfss_chorn
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
5.2-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
5.2-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Far Field Overlays
Edit SourcesEdit SourcesEdit SourcesEdit Sources
To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Edit SourcesHFSS > Fields > Edit SourcesHFSS > Fields > Edit SourcesHFSS > Fields > Edit Sources
2. Edit Sources window
1. Source: p1:1p1:1p1:1p1:1
1. Scaling Factor: 1111
2. Offset: 0000
2. Source: p1:2p1:2p1:2p1:2
1. Scaling Factor: 1111
2. OffsetPhase: 90909090
4. Quantity: GainLHCP, GainRHCPGainLHCP, GainRHCPGainLHCP, GainRHCPGainLHCP, GainRHCP

Training Manual
5.2-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
-36.00
-22.00
-8.00
6.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainLHCP)
Setup1 : LastAdaptive
Freq='5GHz' Phi='0deg'
dB(GainLHCP)
dB(GainRHCP)
dB(GainRHCP)

Training Manual
5.3-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Probe Feed Patch Antenna
The Probe Feed Patch Antenna
probe feed patch antenna using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
Infinite Ground
Sub1 (Dielectric)
Patch (Signal)
0.32cm

Training Manual
5.3-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
the Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11.

Training Manual
5.3-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
5.3-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: cmcmcmcm
1. Type Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm) in the Search by NameSearch by NameSearch by NameSearch by Name field

Training Manual
5.3-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create SubstrateCreate SubstrateCreate SubstrateCreate Substrate
To create the substrate:To create the substrate:To create the substrate:To create the substrate:
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the box
To set the AttributeTo set the AttributeTo set the AttributeTo set the Attribute
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Sub1Sub1Sub1Sub1
3. Set TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent level to 0.7
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View.... Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D key

Training Manual
5.3-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Infinite GroundCreate Infinite GroundCreate Infinite GroundCreate Infinite Ground
To create the infinite ground:To create the infinite ground:To create the infinite ground:To create the infinite ground:
1. Select the menu item Draw > RectangleDraw > RectangleDraw > RectangleDraw > Rectangle
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the rectangle position
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Inf_GNDInf_GNDInf_GNDInf_GND
Assign a Perfect E boundary to the Infinite GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Infinite GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Infinite GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Infinite Ground
To select the trace:To select the trace:To select the trace:To select the trace:
1. Select the objects named: Inf_GNDInf_GNDInf_GNDInf_GND
To assign the Perfect E boundaryTo assign the Perfect E boundaryTo assign the Perfect E boundaryTo assign the Perfect E boundary
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Perfect EHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Perfect EHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Perfect EHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Perfect E
2. Perfect E Boundary window
1. Name: PerfE_Inf_GNDPerfE_Inf_GNDPerfE_Inf_GNDPerfE_Inf_GND
2. Infinite Ground Plane: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.3-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Infinite Ground Cut OutCreate Infinite Ground Cut OutCreate Infinite Ground Cut OutCreate Infinite Ground Cut Out
To create the cut out:To create the cut out:To create the cut out:To create the cut out:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Cut_OutCut_OutCut_OutCut_Out
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View
Complete the Infinite GroundComplete the Infinite GroundComplete the Infinite GroundComplete the Infinite Ground
To select the objects Inf_GND & Cut_Out:To select the objects Inf_GND & Cut_Out:To select the objects Inf_GND & Cut_Out:To select the objects Inf_GND & Cut_Out:
1. Select the objects named: Inf_GND, Cut_OutInf_GND, Cut_OutInf_GND, Cut_OutInf_GND, Cut_Out
To complete the ring:To complete the ring:To complete the ring:To complete the ring:
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: Inf_GnDInf_GnDInf_GnDInf_GnD
Tool Parts: Cut_OutCut_OutCut_OutCut_Out

Training Manual
5.3-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create PatchCreate PatchCreate PatchCreate Patch
To create the patch:To create the patch:To create the patch:To create the patch:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: PatchPatchPatchPatch
Assign a Perfect E boundary to the TraceAssign a Perfect E boundary to the TraceAssign a Perfect E boundary to the TraceAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Trace
1. Select the objects named: PatchPatchPatchPatch
1. Name: PerfE_PatchPerfE_PatchPerfE_PatchPerfE_Patch

Training Manual
5.3-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum
Create the CoaxCreate the CoaxCreate the CoaxCreate the Coax
To create the coax:To create the coax:To create the coax:To create the coax:
X: ----0.50.50.50.5, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: ----0.50.50.50.5 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: CoaxCoaxCoaxCoax

Training Manual
5.3-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Coax PinCreate the Coax PinCreate the Coax PinCreate the Coax Pin
To create the coax pin:To create the coax pin:To create the coax pin:To create the coax pin:
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: ----0.50.50.50.5 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Coax_PinCoax_PinCoax_PinCoax_Pin

Training Manual
5.3-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X:::: ----0.50.50.50.5, Y: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Z:::: ----0.50.50.50.5 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Port1Port1Port1Port1
To select the object Port1:To select the object Port1:To select the object Port1:To select the object Port1:
1. Select the objects named: Port1Port1Port1Port1
2. In the pop up Reference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for Terminals window, leave PinPinPinPin in
Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
5.3-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the ProbeCreate the ProbeCreate the ProbeCreate the Probe
To create the probe:To create the probe:To create the probe:To create the probe:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ProbeProbeProbeProbe

Training Manual
5.3-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create the air:To create the air:To create the air:To create the air:
To set the Atttribute:To set the Atttribute:To set the Atttribute:To set the Atttribute:
3. Set TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent level to 0.90.90.90.9

Training Manual
5.3-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Picking the faces:Picking the faces:Picking the faces:Picking the faces:
2. Graphically select allallallall of the facesfacesfacesfaces of the AirAirAirAir object exceptexceptexceptexcept the face at Z=0.0cmface at Z=0.0cmface at Z=0.0cmface at Z=0.0cm
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign> Radiation
1. Select the Infinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite Sphere Tab

Training Manual
5.3-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
2. Click the OptionOptionOptionOption tab:
Solution Operations/ Order of Basis Functions: Second OrderSecond OrderSecond OrderSecond Order
Enable Iterative Solver CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SweepHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Sweep
Count: 201: 201: 201: 201

Training Manual
5.3-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_probepatchhfss_probepatchhfss_probepatchhfss_probepatch
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
5.3-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To view the Mesh StatisticsTo view the Mesh StatisticsTo view the Mesh StatisticsTo view the Mesh Statistics
1. Click the Mesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh Statistics Tab

Training Manual
5.3-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Report> Rectangular PlotReport> Rectangular PlotReport> Rectangular PlotReport> Rectangular Plot
3. Click the TraceTraceTraceTrace tab
2. Quantity: St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1)St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1)St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1)St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1) Function: dBdBdBdB
Mark all tracesMark all tracesMark all tracesMark all traces
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select AllEdit > Select AllEdit > Select AllEdit > Select All
2. Select the menu item Report 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add Minimum
3. When you are finished, select the menu item Report 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > Clear
AllAllAllAll to remove the marker.
1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50
Freq [GHz]
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
dB(St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1))
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1XY Plot 1
m1
Curve Info
dB(St(coax_pin_T1,coax_pin_T1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 2.3625 -21.4575

Training Manual
5.3-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Far Field Overlays
3. In the FamiliesFamiliesFamiliesFamilies tab, change the frequency to 2.3625GHz2.3625GHz2.3625GHz2.3625GHz
1. Primary Sweep: ThetaThetaThetaTheta
3. Quantity: GainTotalGainTotalGainTotalGainTotal
-14.00
-8.00
-2.00
4.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainTotal)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Phi='0deg'
dB(GainTotal)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Phi='90deg'

Training Manual
5.4-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Slot Coupled Patch Antenna
The Slot Coupled Patch Antenna
probe feed patch antenna using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
Slot (Plane)
Feed (Signal)
Sub2 (Dielectric) 0.16cm
Sub1 (Dielectric)
Patch (Signal)
0.16cm

Training Manual
5.4-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
the Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11Ansoft > HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11
Use Wizards for data input when creating new boundaries::::

Training Manual
5.4-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
5.4-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Type RogersRogersRogersRogers in the Search by NameSearch by NameSearch by NameSearch by Name field and select the row for
Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)Rogers RT/duroid 5880 (tm)

Training Manual
5.4-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Sub1Sub1Sub1Sub1
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to Light GrayLight GrayLight GrayLight Gray
4. Change the TrasparencyTrasparencyTrasparencyTrasparency to 0.60.60.60.6

Training Manual
5.4-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the FeedCreate the FeedCreate the FeedCreate the Feed
To create the feed:To create the feed:To create the feed:To create the feed:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: FeedFeedFeedFeed
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to Bright BlueBright BlueBright BlueBright Blue
Assign a Perfect E boundary to the FeedAssign a Perfect E boundary to the FeedAssign a Perfect E boundary to the FeedAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Feed
To select the feed:To select the feed:To select the feed:To select the feed:
1. Select the objects named: FeedFeedFeedFeed
1. Name: PerfE_FeedPerfE_FeedPerfE_FeedPerfE_Feed
2. Infinite Ground Plane: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked

Training Manual
5.4-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create GroundCreate GroundCreate GroundCreate Ground
To create the ground:To create the ground:To create the ground:To create the ground:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: GroundGroundGroundGround
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to RedRedRedRed
4. Change the TransparencyTransparencyTransparencyTransparency to 0.80.80.80.8
Assign a Perfect E boundary to the GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the GroundAssign a Perfect E boundary to the Ground
To select the ground:To select the ground:To select the ground:To select the ground:
1. Select the objects named: GroundGroundGroundGround
1. Name: PerfE_GroundPerfE_GroundPerfE_GroundPerfE_Ground
2. Infinite Ground Plane: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked

Training Manual
5.4-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Slot Cut OutCreate Slot Cut OutCreate Slot Cut OutCreate Slot Cut Out
To create the cut out:To create the cut out:To create the cut out:To create the cut out:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: SlotSlotSlotSlot
Complete the GroundComplete the GroundComplete the GroundComplete the Ground
To select the objects ground & slotTo select the objects ground & slotTo select the objects ground & slotTo select the objects ground & slot
1. Select the objects named: Ground, SlotGround, SlotGround, SlotGround, Slot
To perform the boolean subtraction:To perform the boolean subtraction:To perform the boolean subtraction:To perform the boolean subtraction:
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: GroundGroundGroundGround
Tool Parts: SlotSlotSlotSlot

Training Manual
5.4-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create PatchCreate PatchCreate PatchCreate Patch
To create the patch:To create the patch:To create the patch:To create the patch:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: PatchPatchPatchPatch
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to OrangeOrangeOrangeOrange
4. Change the TransparencyTransparencyTransparencyTransparency to 0.40.40.40.4
To select the patch:To select the patch:To select the patch:To select the patch:
1. Select the objects named: PatchPatchPatchPatch
1. Name: PerfE_PatchPerfE_PatchPerfE_PatchPerfE_Patch

Training Manual
5.4-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: ----7.07.07.07.0, Y: ----4.54.54.54.5, Z: ----2.02.02.02.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to BlackBlackBlackBlack
4. Change Display WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay Wireframe to CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.4-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Picking the faces:Picking the faces:Picking the faces:Picking the faces:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Radiation
1. Select the Infinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite Sphere Tab

Training Manual
5.4-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Add Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation BoundaryAdd Length Based Mesh Operation to the Radiation Boundary
Far fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiaFar fields are calculated by integrating the fields on the radiation surface. Totion surface. Totion surface. Totion surface. To
obtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integrationobtain accurate far fields for antenna problems, the integration surface should besurface should besurface should besurface should be
forced to have aforced to have aforced to have aforced to have a λλλλ/6 to/6 to/6 to/6 to λλλλ/8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length./8 maximum tetrahedra length.
To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:To create a length based seed on the radiation boundary:
1. Select the AirAirAirAir object by left clicking it in the drawing window
2. While the AirAirAirAir object is selected, move the mouse to the project tree and
right click on Mesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh Operations >>>> AssignAssignAssignAssign >>>> On SelectionOn SelectionOn SelectionOn Selection >>>> Length BasedLength BasedLength BasedLength Based
3. Name: LengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiationLengthOnRadiation
4. Maximum Length of Elements: 2cm2cm2cm2cm (this is about λλλλ/6/6/6/6 at 2.3GHz2.3GHz2.3GHz2.3GHz)

Training Manual
5.4-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Grid PlaneSet Grid PlaneSet Grid PlaneSet Grid Plane
To set the grid plane:To set the grid plane:To set the grid plane:To set the grid plane:
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZ
Create SourceCreate SourceCreate SourceCreate Source
To create source:To create source:To create source:To create source:
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: SourceSourceSourceSource
3. Change the ColorColorColorColor to Bright GreenBright GreenBright GreenBright Green

Training Manual
5.4-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign ExcitationAssign ExcitationAssign ExcitationAssign Excitation
To select the object Source:To select the object Source:To select the object Source:To select the object Source:
1. Select the objects named: SourceSourceSourceSource
NoteNoteNoteNote: You can also select the object from the Model
Tree
To assign lumped port excitationTo assign lumped port excitationTo assign lumped port excitationTo assign lumped port excitation
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped PortHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port
2. Place FeedFeedFeedFeed in the Conducting ObjectConducting ObjectConducting ObjectConducting Object list and GroundGroundGroundGround in the ReferenceReferenceReferenceReference
ConductorConductorConductorConductor list
Rename the Lumped Port and TerminalRename the Lumped Port and TerminalRename the Lumped Port and TerminalRename the Lumped Port and Terminal
1. Double click on LumpPort1LumpPort1LumpPort1LumpPort1 under ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations in the project tree.
2. Rename the port to p1p1p1p1
4. Double click on the terminal named Feed_T1Feed_T1Feed_T1Feed_T1
5. Rename the terminal to T1T1T1T1

Training Manual
5.4-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SolutionHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SolutionHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add SolutionHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution
SetupSetupSetupSetup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
2. Click the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab:
Enable Iterative Solver: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add FrequencyHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add FrequencyHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add FrequencyHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Frequency
SweepSweepSweepSweep
Count: 201: 201: 201: 201

Training Manual
5.4-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_slotpatchhfss_slotpatchhfss_slotpatchhfss_slotpatch
Manager.

Training Manual
5.4-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:To view the Mesh Statistics:
1. Click the Mesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh StatisticsMesh Statistics Tab.

Training Manual
5.4-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
4. Quantity: St(T1,T1),St(T1,T1),St(T1,T1),St(T1,T1),
3. Add a minimum marker to the trace
1. Select the trace by left clicking on it
2. Go to Report2DReport2DReport2DReport2D >>>> MarkerMarkerMarkerMarker >>>> Add MinimumAdd MinimumAdd MinimumAdd Minimum
1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50
Freq [GHz]
-12.00
-10.00
-8.00
-6.00
-4.00
-2.00
0.00
dB(St(p1,p1))
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1XY Plot 1
m1
Curve Info
dB(St(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 2.2875 -10.1263

Training Manual
5.4-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Far Field Overlays
3. In the FamiliesFamiliesFamiliesFamilies tab, change the frequency to 2.2875GHz2.2875GHz2.2875GHz2.2875GHz
2. Quantity: GainPhi, GainThetaGainPhi, GainThetaGainPhi, GainThetaGainPhi, GainTheta
-60.00
-40.00
-20.00
0.00
90
60
30
0
-30
-60
-90
-120
-150
-180
150
120
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1Radiation Pattern 1
Curve Info
dB(GainPhi)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Freq='2.2875GHz' Phi='0deg'
dB(GainPhi)
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(GainTheta)
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(GainTheta)
Setup1 : Sweep1

Training Manual
5.5-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Waveguide Array Example
The Waveguide Array
Waveguide array antenna using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment
A WavePort will be used for the waveguide feed excitation
A Floquet Port will be used for the phased array’s free space excitation and
termination
Master/Slave boundary conditions will be used to create the array’s unit cell
Reference:
[1] N. Amitay, V. Galindo and C. Wu, “Theory and Analysis of Phased Array Antennas”, Wiley-Interscience,
1972, ISBN 0-471-02553-4, section5.2.1.

Training Manual
5.5-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Instead of modeling the entire array, we will make use of the master/slave
boundaries and only model a unit cell.
A Floquet Port will be used to excite and terminate the model from free space.
This port works in conjunction with the Master/Slave boundaries to enforce the
array’s periodicity and allow for a changing scan angle.
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Box
Ports: Wave Ports, Floquet Ports
Boundaries: Master/Slave
Analysis
Sweep: Interpolating
Results
Cartesian plotting
Optimetrics
Parametric sweep

Training Manual
5.5-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Launching Ansoft HFSS
To access Ansoft HFSS, click the Microsoft Start button, select Programs, and
select the Ansoft > HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11
Setting Tool Options
To set the tool options:
Note: In order to follow the steps outlined in this example, verify that the
following tool options are set :
Select the menu item Tools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS OptionsTools > Options > HFSS Options
HFSS Options Window:
Click the GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral tab
Use Wizards for data entry when creating new boundaries:
Duplicate boundaries with geometry: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Select the menu item Tools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler OptionsTools > Options > Modeler Options.
3D Modeler Options Window:
Click the OperationOperationOperationOperation tab
Automatically cover closed polylines: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Click the DrawingDrawingDrawingDrawing tab
Edit properties of new primitives: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.5-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Opening a New Project
To open a new project:
When Ansoft HFSS opens it should automatically open a new project.
Set Solution Type
To set the solution type:
Select the menu item HFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution Type
Solution Type Window:
Choose Driven ModalDriven ModalDriven ModalDriven Modal
Set Model Units
To set the units:
Select the menu item Modeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > Units
Set Model Units:
Select Units: inininin
Set Default Material
To set the default material:
Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, make sure that vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum is the
default material

Training Manual
5.5-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Waveguide
To create the waveguide:
Select the menu item Draw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > Box
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the box position
X: ----12.2812.2812.2812.28, Y: ----12.2812.2812.2812.28, Z: ----55555555, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the box
dX: 24.5624.5624.5624.56, dY: 24.56: 24.56: 24.56: 24.56, dZ: 55555555, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
To set the name:
Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from the Properties window.
For the Value of NameNameNameName type: waveguidewaveguidewaveguidewaveguide
Click on the Value of TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent and change the Value to 0.80.80.80.8
Click the OKOKOKOK button to accept the transparency changes
To fit the view:
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D
keys

Training Manual
5.5-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Airbox
To create the airbox:
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the box position
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the box
To set the name:
Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from the Properties window.
For the Value of NameNameNameName type: AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox
Click on the Value of TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent and change the Value to 0.80.80.80.8
Click the OKOKOKOK button to accept the transparency changes
To fit the view:
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D
keys
To deselect all object:
Select the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All

Training Manual
5.5-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create First Master Boundary
To select the Master boundary face
Select the menu item Edit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > FacesEdit > Select > Faces
Select the menu item Edit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By Name
Select Face dialog: Select the object AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox from the left column
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDsFaceIDsFaceIDsFaceIDs until the side face located on the
positive xpositive xpositive xpositive x----axisaxisaxisaxis of the AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox is highlighted.
To create the Master Boundary
Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Master
Complete Master Boundary dialog window
Name: Master1Master1Master1Master1
Coordinate System: U VectorU VectorU VectorU Vector: Click the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and
selectselectselectselect New VectorNew VectorNew VectorNew Vector.
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the start position
X:13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z:0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the stop position of the
vector
dX: 0000, dY: 26.49226.49226.49226.492, dZ: 0000, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
For the V vectorV vectorV vectorV vector, check the Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.5-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Second Master Boundary
To select the Master boundary face
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDFaceIDFaceIDFaceIDs until the side face located on the
positive ypositive ypositive ypositive y----axisaxisaxisaxis of the AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox is highlighted.
To create the Master Boundary
Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > MasterHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Master
Complete Master Boundary dialog window
Name: Master2Master2Master2Master2
Coordinate System: U VectoU VectoU VectoU Vector: click the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and
select New Vectorselect New Vectorselect New Vectorselect New Vector.
X:13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y: 13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z:0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector
dX: ----26.49226.49226.49226.492, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
For the V vectorV vectorV vectorV vector, check the Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction:Reverse Direction: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
5.5-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create First Slave Boundary
To select the Slave boundary face
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDFaceIDFaceIDFaceIDs until the side face located on the
negative xnegative xnegative xnegative x----axisaxisaxisaxis of the AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox is highlighted.
To create the Slave Boundary
Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Slave
Complete General Data Tab
Name: Slave1Slave1Slave1Slave1
Master Boundary: click on UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and select: Master1Master1Master1Master1
Coordinate System: U VectoU VectoU VectoU Vector: click the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and
select New Vectorselect New Vectorselect New Vectorselect New Vector.
X: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z:0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector
Click the NextNextNextNext button
Continued on next page

Training Manual
5.5-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create the Slave Boundary (Continued)
Complete Phase Delay Tab
Make sure that Use Scan Angles To Calculate Phase DelayUse Scan Angles To Calculate Phase DelayUse Scan Angles To Calculate Phase DelayUse Scan Angles To Calculate Phase Delay is
checked
For PhiPhiPhiPhi, enter a variable name phi_scanphi_scanphi_scanphi_scan
For ThetaThetaThetaTheta, enter a variable name theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan
Click the FinishFinishFinishFinish button
For the Add VariableAdd VariableAdd VariableAdd Variable dialog corresponding to phi_scanphi_scanphi_scanphi_scan,
Enter 90deg90deg90deg90deg
For the Add VariableAdd VariableAdd VariableAdd Variable dialog corresponding to theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan,
Enter 0deg0deg0deg0deg
Create Second Slave Boundary
To select the Slave boundary face
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDFaceIDFaceIDFaceIDs until the side face located on the negativenegativenegativenegative
yyyy----axisaxisaxisaxis of the AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox is highlighted.

Training Manual
5.5-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Second Slave Boundary (continued)
To create Slave boundary
Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > SlaveHFSS > Boundaries > Assign > Slave
Complete General Data Tab
Name: Slave2Slave2Slave2Slave2
Master Boundary: click on UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and select: Master2Master2Master2Master2
Coordinate System: U VectorU VectorU VectorU Vector: click the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown and
select New Vector.New Vector.New Vector.New Vector.
X: 13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y:::: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
vector
dX: ----26.49226.49226.49226.492, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the Enter key
checked

Training Manual
5.5-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create WavePort
To select the Waveport face
Select the object waveguidewaveguidewaveguidewaveguide from the left column
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDFaceIDFaceIDFaceIDs until the bottombottombottombottom face of the
waveguidewaveguidewaveguidewaveguide is highlighted.
To create WavePort:
Select the menu item HFSS > Excitation > Assign > WavePortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > WavePortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > WavePortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > WavePort
Complete the General Tab
Name: p1p1p1p1
Click NextNextNextNext
Complete the Modes Tab
Number of Modes: 2222
Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1Mode 1: click on the NoneNoneNoneNone pulldown located under the IntegrationIntegrationIntegrationIntegration
Line ColumnLine ColumnLine ColumnLine Column and select New LineNew LineNew LineNew Line
X: ----12.2812.2812.2812.28, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: ----55.055.055.055.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector

Training Manual
5.5-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create WavePort (continued):
Complete Mode Tab (continued)
Mode 2: click on the NoneNoneNoneNone pulldown located under the IntegrationIntegrationIntegrationIntegration
Line ColumnLine ColumnLine ColumnLine Column and select New LineNew LineNew LineNew Line
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: ----12.2812.2812.2812.28, Z: ----55555555, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector
dX:0.00.00.00.0, dY: 24.5624.5624.5624.56, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Polarize E Field: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Checking Polarize E Field will cause HFSS to use the
analytical waveguide mode solutions to properly polarize the
electric field in the port. The analytical solution is only
invoked for canonical waveguide structures like rectangular
waveguide, circular waveguide and coaxial waveguide. For
all other port geometries HFSS will enforce the polarization
with out the analytical solution. HFSS still performs a
numerical solution of the port’s modes, but will orient the field
polarizations through its knowledge of the analytical solution.
Complete the Post Processing Tab
Click FinishFinishFinishFinish

Training Manual
5.5-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create FloquetPort
To select the FloquetPort face
Select the object AirboxAirboxAirboxAirbox from the left column
SelectSelectSelectSelect different FaceIDFaceIDFaceIDFaceIDs until the toptoptoptop face of the AirBoxAirBoxAirBoxAirBox is
highlighted.
To create FloquetPort:
Select the menu item HFSS > Excitation > Assign > Floquet PortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > Floquet PortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > Floquet PortHFSS > Excitation > Assign > Floquet Port
Complete the General Tab
Name: FP1FP1FP1FP1
A Direction Lattice Coordinate: clickclickclickclick on the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown
located and select New VectorNew VectorNew VectorNew Vector
X: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z: 55555555, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector
B Direction Lattice Coordinate: clickclickclickclick on the UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined pulldown
located and select New VectorNew VectorNew VectorNew Vector
X: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Y: ----13.24613.24613.24613.246, Z: 55555555, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
vector
dX:0.00.00.00.0, dY: 26.49226.49226.49226.492, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Click NextNextNextNext

Training Manual
5.5-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create FloquetPort (continued):
checked
Click the Modes CalculatorModes CalculatorModes CalculatorModes Calculator button
Complete the Modes Setup Tab
Number of Modes: 10101010
Frequency: 299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz
checked
Phi: 90 deg90 deg90 deg90 deg
Theta: 90 deg90 deg90 deg90 deg
•HFSS has a Modes Calculator to help determine the number of modes that should
be included in the Floquet Port. Any mode that is not defined in the Modes Setup
Tab will be short circuited at the port and reflected back toward the array. For
accurate results all modes that have a significant amount of energy at the port
must be included in the Modes Setup Tab.
• The Floquet Mode calculator is going to request the number of modes that should
be evaluated, a frequency and a scan angle to calculate each mode’s attenuation
constant. The modes with the least attenuation are going to occur at the highest
simulation frequency and at locations in the scan volume that are close to grating
lobes. Therefore, we are going to set these conditions in the Modes Calculator to
determine the attenuation in dB/length for each mode. We will then restrict the
number of modes to only include the modes with a significant contribution to the
array’s performance
•HFSS has a Modes Calculator to help determine the number of modes that should
be included in the Floquet Port. Any mode that is not defined in the Modes Setup
Tab will be short circuited at the port and reflected back toward the array. For
accurate results all modes that have a significant amount of energy at the port
must be included in the Modes Setup Tab.
• The Floquet Mode calculator is going to request the number of modes that should
be evaluated, a frequency and a scan angle to calculate each mode’s attenuation
constant. The modes with the least attenuation are going to occur at the highest
simulation frequency and at locations in the scan volume that are close to grating
lobes. Therefore, we are going to set these conditions in the Modes Calculator to
determine the attenuation in dB/length for each mode. We will then restrict the
number of modes to only include the modes with a significant contribution to the
array’s performance

Training Manual
5.5-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
•Notice that the first 4 modes have an attenuation of 0.00 dB/length. This indicates that they
are propagating modes. The TE00 and TM00 modes correspond to the main beams of the x
and y polarized patterns. respectively. The TE0-1 and TM0-1 modes correspond to the
grating lobes of x and y polarized patterns.
•Modes 5 through 10 have attenuation of 1.67 dB/length or 2.06 dB/length depending the
mode. The length portion of this attenuation is calculated in the model’s unit (inches for this
example). To calculate a mode’s total attenuation from the array to the Floquet Port, the
attenuation value displayed in the Modes Setup Tab needs to be multiplied by the distance
between the array face and the Floquet Port.
•For this example this distance is 55in. Therefore the TE-1-1 mode experiences 1.67*55 =
91.85dB of attenuation as it propagates from the array face to the Floquet Port.
•Likewise the TE10 mode experience 2.06*55 = 113.3dB of attenuation across this same
distance.
•It therefore is safe to only include the first 4 modes in the Floquet Port definition.
•Notice that the first 4 modes have an attenuation of 0.00 dB/length. This indicates that they
are propagating modes. The TE00 and TM00 modes correspond to the main beams of the x
and y polarized patterns. respectively. The TE0-1 and TM0-1 modes correspond to the
grating lobes of x and y polarized patterns.
•Modes 5 through 10 have attenuation of 1.67 dB/length or 2.06 dB/length depending the
mode. The length portion of this attenuation is calculated in the model’s unit (inches for this
example). To calculate a mode’s total attenuation from the array to the Floquet Port, the
attenuation value displayed in the Modes Setup Tab needs to be multiplied by the distance
between the array face and the Floquet Port.
•For this example this distance is 55in. Therefore the TE-1-1 mode experiences 1.67*55 =
91.85dB of attenuation as it propagates from the array face to the Floquet Port.
•Likewise the TE10 mode experience 2.06*55 = 113.3dB of attenuation across this same
distance.
•It therefore is safe to only include the first 4 modes in the Floquet Port definition.

Training Manual
5.5-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create FloquetPort (continued):
Change the Number of ModesNumber of ModesNumber of ModesNumber of Modes: 4444
Complete the 3D Refinement Tab
Complete the Post Processing Tab
•For this example we only included the modes that propagate at the highest simulated
frequency for the largest scan angle in the plane corresponding the closest grating
lobe. Although these modes are propagating for this instance, they may not be
propagating for other cases where the frequency is lower or the scan angle as
extreme. The cases where any of these modes are heavily attenuated can cause an
unusually dense mesh concentrated at the port. This will significantly decrease the
simulation efficiency and in many phased array cases there is more interest in
terminating these modes than exciting them. To improve the simulation’s efficiency
HFSS allows you to determine which Floquet Modes are excited for the purposes of
refining the mesh during the adaptive meshing process. Which modes affect the
adaptive meshing process is controlled by checking the box under the Affects
Refinement column on the 3D Refinement Tab. This exercise is only interested in
exciting the problem from the waveguide side. Therefore none of the Floquet Modes
are going to be excited in the adaptive mesh refinement
•For this example we only included the modes that propagate at the highest simulated
frequency for the largest scan angle in the plane corresponding the closest grating
lobe. Although these modes are propagating for this instance, they may not be
propagating for other cases where the frequency is lower or the scan angle as
extreme. The cases where any of these modes are heavily attenuated can cause an
unusually dense mesh concentrated at the port. This will significantly decrease the
simulation efficiency and in many phased array cases there is more interest in
terminating these modes than exciting them. To improve the simulation’s efficiency
HFSS allows you to determine which Floquet Modes are excited for the purposes of
refining the mesh during the adaptive meshing process. Which modes affect the
adaptive meshing process is controlled by checking the box under the Affects
Refinement column on the 3D Refinement Tab. This exercise is only interested in
exciting the problem from the waveguide side. Therefore none of the Floquet Modes
are going to be excited in the adaptive mesh refinement

Training Manual
5.5-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating an Analysis Setup
To create an analysis setup:
Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
Solution Setup Window:
Click the GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral tab:
Solution Frequency: 299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Click the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab:
Minimum Number of Passes: 5555
Creating a Frequency Sweep:
To create an analysis setup:
Select the menu item HFSS> Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS> Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS> Analysis Setup > Add Frequency SweepHFSS> Analysis Setup > Add Frequency Sweep
Choose Setup1Setup1Setup1Setup1 from pop-up window and click the OKOKOKOK button
Edit Sweep Window
Sweep Type: InterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolating
Frequency Setup Type: LinearStepLinearStepLinearStepLinearStep
Start: 200MHz200MHz200MHz200MHz
Stop: 300MHz300MHz300MHz300MHz
Step: 0.1MHz0.1MHz0.1MHz0.1MHz

Training Manual
5.5-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Save Project
To save the project:
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_arrayhfss_arrayhfss_arrayhfss_array
Analyze
Model Validation
To validate the model:
Manager.
Analyze
To start the solution process:

Training Manual
5.5-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solution Data
To view the Solution Data:
Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution Data
To view the Profile:
Click the ProfileProfileProfileProfile Tab.
To view the Convergence:
Click the ConvergenceConvergenceConvergenceConvergence Tab
NoteNoteNoteNote: The default view for convergence is Table. Select the
Plot radio button to view a graphical representations of the
convergence data.
To view the Matrix Data:
Click the Matrix DataMatrix DataMatrix DataMatrix Data Tab
NoteNoteNoteNote: To view a real-time update of the Matrix Data, set the
Simulation to Setup1, Last Adaptive during solution.
Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when done viewing or simulation
complete.

Training Manual
5.5-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Floquet Mode Plot vs Frequency
To create a Rectangular plot :
Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution Data
New Report – New Traces Window:
Solution: Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1Setup1: Sweep1
Category: SSSS----ParameterParameterParameterParameter
Quantity: S(FP1:3,P1:1), S(FP1:4,P1:1), S(P1:1,P1:1)S(FP1:3,P1:1), S(FP1:4,P1:1), S(P1:1,P1:1)S(FP1:3,P1:1), S(FP1:4,P1:1), S(P1:1,P1:1)S(FP1:3,P1:1), S(FP1:4,P1:1), S(P1:1,P1:1)
Function: dBdBdBdB
Click the New ReportNew ReportNew ReportNew Report button
Click the Close button
•This plot shows how the X-Polarized Waveguide mode couples into the TE00 and TM00
modes at boresight as frequency is swept from 200MHz to 300MHz.
•Notice that just above 240MHz the return loss spikes to 0dB and the coupling to both the TE00
and TM00 modes show a sharp discontinuity. This is caused by the TE10 waveguide mode
transitioning out from being cutoff.
•This plot shows how the X-Polarized Waveguide mode couples into the TE00 and TM00
modes at boresight as frequency is swept from 200MHz to 300MHz.
•Notice that just above 240MHz the return loss spikes to 0dB and the coupling to both the TE00
and TM00 modes show a sharp discontinuity. This is caused by the TE10 waveguide mode
transitioning out from being cutoff.

Training Manual
5.5-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Optimetrics Setup
For this array design, we want to see the effect of scan angle on the input match
of the antenna. To do this, we must sweep the scan angle with a parametric
sweep.
Add a Second Solution Setup
Create an analysis setup:
Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupHFSS > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
Solution Setup Window:
Click the General tab:
Setup Name: Setup2Setup2Setup2Setup2
Solution Frequency: 299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz299.79 MHz
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Click the Options tab:
Minimum Number of Passes: 2222

Training Manual
5.5-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Add a Parametric Sweep
To create a parametric setup
Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add Parametric
Setup Sweep Analysis Window:
Click the Sweep Definitions tab:
Click the AddAddAddAdd button
Add/Edit Sweep Dialog
Select Variable: theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan
Select Linear StepLinear StepLinear StepLinear Step
Start: 0deg0deg0deg0deg
Stop: 90deg90deg90deg90deg
Step: 10deg10deg10deg10deg
Click the Add >>Add >>Add >>Add >> button
Click the GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral tab:
Uncheck Setup1 IncludeSetup1 IncludeSetup1 IncludeSetup1 Include
Click the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab:
Check Save Fields and MeshesSave Fields and MeshesSave Fields and MeshesSave Fields and Meshes
Check Copy geometrically equivalent meshesCopy geometrically equivalent meshesCopy geometrically equivalent meshesCopy geometrically equivalent meshes
Click OKOKOKOK to accept the Parametric Sweep settings
Note: The plots shown for the parametric sweep contain
an additional sweep for theta_scan to improve the plot
resolution:
•Type: Linear Step
•Start: 27.1deg
•Stop: 27.9deg
•Step: 0.1deg
Note: The plots shown for the parametric sweep contain
an additional sweep for theta_scan to improve the plot
resolution:
•Type: Linear Step
•Start: 27.1deg
•Stop: 27.9deg
•Step: 0.1deg

Training Manual
5.5-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Save Project
To save the project:
In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > SaveFile > SaveFile > SaveFile > Save
Analyze Parametric Sweep
To start the solution process:
Expand the Project Tree to display the items listed under Optimetrics
Right-click the mouse on ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1 and choose AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze
Optimetrics Results
To view the Optimetrics Results:
Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics Results
Select the Profile Tab to view the solution progress for each setup.
Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when you are finished viewing the results

Training Manual
5.5-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Propagation Constant Plot
To create a report:
Traces Window:
Solution: Setup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptive
XXXX: Switch to theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan
Category: GammaGammaGammaGamma
Quantity: Select All QuantitiesSelect All QuantitiesSelect All QuantitiesSelect All Quantities
Function: ImImImIm
Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button
•Notice that Floquet Modes 1 and 2 do not start propagating until the array is scanned to 29deg.
These mode are the TE0-1 and TM0-1 modes respectively and represent the grating lobes
associated with the E-phi and E-theta patterns respectively. The main beams (TE00 and
TM00) are the 3rd and 4th Floquet Modes. These modes propagate to the edge of real space.
•Notice that Floquet Modes 1 and 2 do not start propagating until the array is scanned to 29deg.
These mode are the TE0-1 and TM0-1 modes respectively and represent the grating lobes
associated with the E-phi and E-theta patterns respectively. The main beams (TE00 and
TM00) are the 3rd and 4th Floquet Modes. These modes propagate to the edge of real space.

Training Manual
5.5-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create S-Parameter Plot
To create a report:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution DataHFSS > Results > Create Modal Solution Data
2. X: Switch to theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan
3. Category: S ParameterS ParameterS ParameterS Parameter
4. Quantity: S(FP1:2,p1:2), S(FP1:4,p1:2), S(p1:2,p1:2)S(FP1:2,p1:2), S(FP1:4,p1:2), S(p1:2,p1:2)S(FP1:2,p1:2), S(FP1:4,p1:2), S(p1:2,p1:2)S(FP1:2,p1:2), S(FP1:4,p1:2), S(p1:2,p1:2)
5. Function: magmagmagmag
•Notice the transmission for the 1st Floquet Mode is not significant until just below 30deg scan.
This mode corresponds to the TM0-1 mode which doesn’t propagate until 29deg scan. At this
same scan angle a scan blindness is observed in the return loss and the transmission for the
4th Floquet Mode (TM00) drops sharply.
•Notice the transmission for the 1st Floquet Mode is not significant until just below 30deg scan.
This mode corresponds to the TM0-1 mode which doesn’t propagate until 29deg scan. At this
same scan angle a scan blindness is observed in the return loss and the transmission for the
4th Floquet Mode (TM00) drops sharply.
0.00 10.00 20.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 70.00 80.00 90.00
theta_scan [deg]
0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
Y1
Curve Info
mag(S(FP1:2,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
mag(S(FP1:4,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'
mag(S(p1:1,p1:1))
Freq='0.29979GHz'

Training Manual
5.5-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Active Element Pattern
To create a report:
Traces Window:
Solution: Setup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptiveSetup2: LastAdaptive
X: Switch to theta_scantheta_scantheta_scantheta_scan
Y:
10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:2,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))
701.8 is the unit cell area in square inches
39.361inches is the wavelength in free space
Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button
Double click on the Y-axis of the plot
Click the Scale tab:
Specify Min: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Min: ----60606060
Spacing: 10101010
0.00 10.00 20.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 70.00 80.00 90.00
theta_scan [deg]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
10.00
20.00
10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:1,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))
Curve Info
10*log(4*pi*701.8/39.361^2*mag(S(p1:1,FP1:4))^2*cos(theta_scan))
Freq='0.29979GHz'

Training Manual
6.1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
The Magic T
Magic T, which is a commonly used microwave device, using the Ansoft HFSS
Design Environment.
Nominal Design:Nominal Design:Nominal Design:Nominal Design:
Waveguide:Waveguide:Waveguide:Waveguide:
Width = 50.0 mmWidth = 50.0 mmWidth = 50.0 mmWidth = 50.0 mm
Height = 20.0 mmHeight = 20.0 mmHeight = 20.0 mmHeight = 20.0 mm
Length =Length =Length =Length = 75.0 mm75.0 mm75.0 mm75.0 mm
Port1
Port2
Port3 Port4
Width
Length
Height

Training Manual
6.1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
The following features of the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment are used to create
this passive device model
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: BoxBoxBoxBox
Boolean Operations: Unite, DuplicateUnite, DuplicateUnite, DuplicateUnite, Duplicate
Excitations
Analysis
Sweep: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency
Results
Fields
3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations

Training Manual
6.1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Getting Started

Training Manual
6.1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
By default, when HFSS first starts up, a new project will be opeBy default, when HFSS first starts up, a new project will be opeBy default, when HFSS first starts up, a new project will be opeBy default, when HFSS first starts up, a new project will be opened.ned.ned.ned.
If you have been working in HFSS and need to open a new project:If you have been working in HFSS and need to open a new project:If you have been working in HFSS and need to open a new project:If you have been working in HFSS and need to open a new project:
2. Expand the folder and review the sub-folders in the Project Manager

Training Manual
6.1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: mmmmmmmm
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials picklist in the toolbar, choose vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum
Create Top ArmCreate Top ArmCreate Top ArmCreate Top Arm
To create arm 1:To create arm 1:To create arm 1:To create arm 1:
2.2.2.2. Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the coordinate entry fiePress the Tab key to move the cursor to the coordinate entry fiePress the Tab key to move the cursor to the coordinate entry fiePress the Tab key to move the cursor to the coordinate entry fieldsldsldslds
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ArmArmArmArm

Training Manual
6.1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Create Wave Port Excitation 1Create Wave Port Excitation 1Create Wave Port Excitation 1Create Wave Port Excitation 1
Picking the port face:Picking the port face:Picking the port face:Picking the port face:
2. Graphically select (click on) the top face of the arm at Z=75mm
1. Name: p1p1p1p1
Top face
Wave Port Face

Training Manual
6.1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Set Object SelectionSet Object SelectionSet Object SelectionSet Object Selection
Set select to objectsSet select to objectsSet select to objectsSet select to objects
Create Arm 2Create Arm 2Create Arm 2Create Arm 2
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible.... Or press the CTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+ACTRL+A key.
2. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around Axis.
1. Axis: XXXX
2. Angle: 90909090
3. Total Number: 2222
5. Click OK in the Properties dialog
Create Arm 3 & 4Create Arm 3 & 4Create Arm 3 & 4Create Arm 3 & 4
To select the object Arm_1:To select the object Arm_1:To select the object Arm_1:To select the object Arm_1:
1. Select the objects named: Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1Arm_1
To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:
1. Axis: ZZZZ
2. Angle: 90909090
5. Click OK in the Properties dialog

Training Manual
6.1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Group the ArmsGroup the ArmsGroup the ArmsGroup the Arms
To group the arms:To group the arms:To group the arms:To group the arms:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All. Or press the CTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+A key
3. Select the menu item Modeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > Unite
4. Select the menu item Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All.Edit > Deselect All. Or press the CTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+ACTRL+SHIFT+A
key
Boundary DisplayBoundary DisplayBoundary DisplayBoundary Display
To verify the boundary setup:To verify the boundary setup:To verify the boundary setup:To verify the boundary setup:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundary DisplayHFSS > Boundary DisplayHFSS > Boundary DisplayHFSS > Boundary Display (Solver View)(Solver View)(Solver View)(Solver View)
2. From the Solver View of Boundaries, toggle the Visibility check box for the
boundaries you wish to display.
Note:Note:Note:Note: The background (Perfect Conductor) is displayed as the outerouterouterouter
boundary.
Note:Note:Note:Note: The Perfect Conductors are displayed as the smetalsmetalsmetalsmetal boundary.
Note:Note:Note:Note: Select the menu item, View > Active View VisibilityView > Active View VisibilityView > Active View VisibilityView > Active View Visibility to hide all
of the geometry objects. This makes it easier to see the boundary
conditions.
3. Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when you are finished

Training Manual
6.1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Analysis Setup
Solution Frequency: 4.0GHz: 4.0GHz: 4.0GHz: 4.0GHz
2. Click the Options Tab
1. Minimum Converged Passes: 3333
1. Sweep Type: Interpolating: Interpolating: Interpolating: Interpolating
Count: 1001: 1001: 1001: 1001

Training Manual
6.1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_magic_thfss_magic_thfss_magic_thfss_magic_t
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
6.1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view a real-time update of the Matrix Data during
analysis, open this dialog and set the Simulation to Setup1,Setup1,Setup1,Setup1,
Last AdaptiveLast AdaptiveLast AdaptiveLast Adaptive

Training Manual
6.1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Create Reports
Create Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal S----Parameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive Pass
Note:Note:Note:Note: If this report is created prior or during the solution process, a real-time
update of the results are displayed
2. Report Dialog::::
1. Solution: Setup1:Setup1:Setup1:Setup1: AdaptivePassAdaptivePassAdaptivePassAdaptivePass
1. X: PassPassPassPass
3. Quantity: S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4) (Note: Hold
down the Ctrl key to select multiple Quantities)
1 .0 0 1 .5 0 2 .0 0 2 .5 0 3 .0 0 3 .5 0 4 .0 0
P a s s
- 7 0 .0 0
- 6 0 .0 0
- 5 0 .0 0
- 4 0 .0 0
- 3 0 .0 0
- 2 0 .0 0
- 1 0 .0 0
0 .0 0
Y1
A n s o f t C o r p o r a tio n H F S S D e s ig n 1X Y P lo t 2
C u rve In fo
d B (S (p 1 , p 1 ))
S e t u p 1 : A d a p t ive P a s s
F re q = '4 G H z '
d B (S (p 1 , p 2 ))
F re q = '4 G H z '
d B (S (p 1 , p 3 ))
F re q = '4 G H z '
d B (S (p 1 , p 4 ))

Training Manual
6.1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Create Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal S----Parameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. Freq
2.2.2.2. Domain: SweepDomain: SweepDomain: SweepDomain: Sweep
1. X: FreqFreqFreqFreq
3. Quantity: S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3), S(p1,p4) (Hold down
the Ctrl key to select multiple Quantities)

Training Manual
6.1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Magic T
Create Field OverlayCreate Field OverlayCreate Field OverlayCreate Field Overlay
To select an object:To select an object:To select an object:To select an object:
1. Select menu item Windows > hfss_magic_TWindows > hfss_magic_TWindows > hfss_magic_TWindows > hfss_magic_T----HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1----ModelerModelerModelerModeler
1. Select the objects named: ArmArmArmArm
4. Select the menu Edit > PropertiesEdit > PropertiesEdit > PropertiesEdit > Properties
1. Select Attribute Tab
2. Click on the Transparency button
3. Set Transparency to aprox .75
4. Click OKOKOKOK button
5. Click OKOKOKOK button to exit properties window
5. Press CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl----AAAA to ensure waveguide is selected.
6. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EMag_EMag_EMag_E
7. Create Field Plot Window
1. Solution: Setup1 :Setup1 :Setup1 :Setup1 : LastAdaptiveLastAdaptiveLastAdaptiveLastAdaptive
2. Quantity: Mag_EMag_EMag_EMag_E
3. In Volume: All ObjectsAll ObjectsAll ObjectsAll Objects
Field AnimationsField AnimationsField AnimationsField Animations
To Animate a Magnitude field plot:To Animate a Magnitude field plot:To Animate a Magnitude field plot:To Animate a Magnitude field plot:
1. Select the menu item View > AnimateView > AnimateView > AnimateView > Animate
2. In the Swept VariableSwept VariableSwept VariableSwept Variable tab, accept the defaults settings:
1. Swept variable: PhasePhasePhasePhase
2. Start: 0deg0deg0deg0deg
3. Stop: 180deg180deg180deg180deg
4. Steps: 9999
3. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
6.2-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Coaxial Connector
The Coaxial Connector
coaxial connector, using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
6.2-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Cylinders,Cylinders,Cylinders,Cylinders, PolylinesPolylinesPolylinesPolylines, Circles, Circles, Circles, Circles
Boolean Operations: Unite, Subtract, and SweepUnite, Subtract, and SweepUnite, Subtract, and SweepUnite, Subtract, and Sweep
Ports: Wave Ports and Terminal LinesWave Ports and Terminal LinesWave Ports and Terminal LinesWave Ports and Terminal Lines
Analysis
Results
Field Overlays:
3D Field Plots, Animations, Cut3D Field Plots, Animations, Cut3D Field Plots, Animations, Cut3D Field Plots, Animations, Cut----PlanesPlanesPlanesPlanes

Training Manual
6.2-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
3. Select the menu item Tools > Options > 3D Modeler OptionsTools > Options > 3D Modeler OptionsTools > Options > 3D Modeler OptionsTools > Options > 3D Modeler Options.

Training Manual
6.2-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.2-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Using the Modeler Materials toolbar, choose SelectSelectSelectSelect

Training Manual
6.2-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Conductor 1Create the Conductor 1Create the Conductor 1Create the Conductor 1
To create the conductorTo create the conductorTo create the conductorTo create the conductor
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1
To create an offset Coordinate System:To create an offset Coordinate System:To create an offset Coordinate System:To create an offset Coordinate System:
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Coordinate System > Create >Modeler > Coordinate System > Create >Modeler > Coordinate System > Create >Modeler > Coordinate System > Create >
Relative CS > OffsetRelative CS > OffsetRelative CS > OffsetRelative CS > Offset
Create a SectionCreate a SectionCreate a SectionCreate a Section
To section the conductorTo section the conductorTo section the conductorTo section the conductor
2. Select the menu item Modeler > Surface > SectionModeler > Surface > SectionModeler > Surface > SectionModeler > Surface > Section
3. Section Window
Section Plane: XYXYXYXY

Training Manual
6.2-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Rename the SectionRename the SectionRename the SectionRename the Section
1. Select the menu item HFSS > ListHFSS > ListHFSS > ListHFSS > List
2. From the ModelModelModelModel tab, select the object named Conductor1_Section1Conductor1_Section1Conductor1_Section1Conductor1_Section1
3. Click the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties button in the bottom
1. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: BendBendBendBend
Create Conductor BendCreate Conductor BendCreate Conductor BendCreate Conductor Bend
To create the bend:To create the bend:To create the bend:To create the bend:
1. Select the menu item Draw > Arc > Center PointDraw > Arc > Center PointDraw > Arc > Center PointDraw > Arc > Center Point
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vertex point:
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radial point:
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the sweep arc length:
5. Using the mouse, right-click and select DoneDoneDoneDone
6. Click the OKOKOKOK button when the Properties dialog appears
Sweep Bend:Sweep Bend:Sweep Bend:Sweep Bend:
1. Select the objects named: Bend, Polyline1Bend, Polyline1Bend, Polyline1Bend, Polyline1
3. Select the menu item Draw > Sweep > Along PathDraw > Sweep > Along PathDraw > Sweep > Along PathDraw > Sweep > Along Path
4. Sweep along path Window
Angle of twist: 0000
Draft Angle: 0000
Draft Type: RoundRoundRoundRound

Training Manual
6.2-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZ
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Coordinate System >Modeler > Coordinate System >Modeler > Coordinate System >Modeler > Coordinate System >
Create > Relative CS > OffsetCreate > Relative CS > OffsetCreate > Relative CS > OffsetCreate > Relative CS > Offset

Training Manual
6.2-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group the ConductorsGroup the ConductorsGroup the ConductorsGroup the Conductors
Select the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All
2. Select the menu item, 3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite

Training Manual
6.2-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Female EndCreate the Female EndCreate the Female EndCreate the Female End
To create the female end:To create the female end:To create the female end:To create the female end:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: FemaleFemaleFemaleFemale
Create the Female BendCreate the Female BendCreate the Female BendCreate the Female Bend
To create the bend:To create the bend:To create the bend:To create the bend:
X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 0.0, Press the Enter key
dXdXdXdX: 0.351,: 0.351,: 0.351,: 0.351, dYdYdYdY: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, dZdZdZdZ: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Press the Enter key
dXdXdXdX: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, dYdYdYdY:::: ----1.236,1.236,1.236,1.236, dZdZdZdZ: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Press the Enter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: FemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBend

Training Manual
6.2-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XY
Create the Male EndCreate the Male EndCreate the Male EndCreate the Male End
To create the male end:To create the male end:To create the male end:To create the male end:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: MaleMaleMaleMale

Training Manual
6.2-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group the Vacuum ObjectsGroup the Vacuum ObjectsGroup the Vacuum ObjectsGroup the Vacuum Objects
To unite the objects Female,To unite the objects Female,To unite the objects Female,To unite the objects Female, FemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBend and Male:and Male:and Male:and Male:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All
1. Select the objects named: Female,Female,Female,Female, FemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBendFemaleBend, Male, Male, Male, Male
Add New MaterialAdd New MaterialAdd New MaterialAdd New Material
To add a new material:To add a new material:To add a new material:To add a new material:
2. From the Select Definition window, click the Add MaterialAdd MaterialAdd MaterialAdd Material button
3. View/Edit Material Window:
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_RingMy_RingMy_RingMy_Ring
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of Relative PermittivityRelative PermittivityRelative PermittivityRelative Permittivity type: 3333

Training Manual
6.2-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the RingCreate the RingCreate the RingCreate the Ring
To create the ring:To create the ring:To create the ring:To create the ring:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: RingRingRingRing
Complete the RingComplete the RingComplete the RingComplete the Ring
To select the objects Ring and Male:To select the objects Ring and Male:To select the objects Ring and Male:To select the objects Ring and Male:
1. Select the objects named: Ring, FemaleRing, FemaleRing, FemaleRing, Female
To complete the ring:To complete the ring:To complete the ring:To complete the ring:
1. Select the menu item 3D Modeler > Boolean > Subtract3D Modeler > Boolean > Subtract3D Modeler > Boolean > Subtract3D Modeler > Boolean > Subtract
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: RingRingRingRing
Tool Parts: FemaleFemaleFemaleFemale
Clone tool objects before subtract: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
6.2-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_TeflonMy_TeflonMy_TeflonMy_Teflon
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of Relative PermittivityRelative PermittivityRelative PermittivityRelative Permittivity type: 2.12.12.12.1
Create the Male TeflonCreate the Male TeflonCreate the Male TeflonCreate the Male Teflon
To create theTo create theTo create theTo create the teflonteflonteflonteflon::::
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon

Training Manual
6.2-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Note:Note:Note:Note: To simplify the instructions, a 2D object will be created to represent the
port. This is not a requirement for defining ports. Graphical face selection can
be used as an alternative.
NoteNoteNoteNote: You can also select the object from the Model Tree

Training Manual
6.2-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Reference Conductors for Terminals window
1. Conducting Objects: Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1
2. Reference Conductors: blankblankblankblank
3. Rename port and terminal names
1. Highlight WavePort1 under the project tree, right click mouse, and
click rename, type p1p1p1p1, and press EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. Same steps apply to Conductor1_T1, and rename it to T1T1T1T1
1. From the list, select the CS: RelativeCS3RelativeCS3RelativeCS3RelativeCS3

Training Manual
6.2-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Note:Note:Note:Note: To simplify the instructions, a 2D object will be created to represent the
port. This is not a requirement for defining ports. Graphical face selection can
be used as an alternative.
2. Reference Conductors for Terminals window
1. Conducting Objects: Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1
2. Reference Conductors: blankblankblankblank
3. Rename port and terminal names
1. Highlight WavePort1 under the project tree, right click mouse, and
click rename, type p2p2p2p2, and press EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. Same steps apply to Conductor1_T2, and rename it to T2T2T2T2

Training Manual
6.2-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Female TeflonCreate the Female TeflonCreate the Female TeflonCreate the Female Teflon
To create the Teflon:To create the Teflon:To create the Teflon:To create the Teflon:
dXdXdXdX: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, dYdYdYdY:::: ----0.236,0.236,0.236,0.236, dZdZdZdZ: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Press the Enter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon
Complete the Vacuum ObjectComplete the Vacuum ObjectComplete the Vacuum ObjectComplete the Vacuum Object
To select the objects Female,To select the objects Female,To select the objects Female,To select the objects Female, MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon,,,, FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon
1. Select the objects named: Female,Female,Female,Female, MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon,,,, FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon
To complete theTo complete theTo complete theTo complete the vacummvacummvacummvacumm objects:objects:objects:objects:
2. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: FemaleFemaleFemaleFemale
Tool Parts: MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon,,,, FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon

Training Manual
6.2-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Complete the ModelComplete the ModelComplete the ModelComplete the Model
To complete the model:To complete the model:To complete the model:To complete the model:
1. Select the objects named: Conductor1, Female,Conductor1, Female,Conductor1, Female,Conductor1, Female, MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon,,,,
FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon
4. Subtract Window
Blank Parts: Female,Female,Female,Female, FemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflonFemaleTeflon,,,, MaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflonMaleTeflon
Tool Parts: Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1Conductor1
boundary.
Note:Note:Note:Note: Select the menu item, View > VisibilityView > VisibilityView > VisibilityView > Visibility to hide all of the
geometry objects. This makes it easier to see the boundary

Training Manual
6.2-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
3. Click the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab::::
Minimum Converged Passes: 2222
Count: 801: 801: 801: 801

Training Manual
6.2-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_coaxhfss_coaxhfss_coaxhfss_coax
Analyze
Manager.
1. Select the menu item HFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > Analyze

Training Manual
6.2-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.2-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive Pass
Note:Note:Note:Note: If this report is created prior to or during the solution process, a
real-time update of the results are displayed
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create TerminalHFSS > Results > Create TerminalHFSS > Results > Create TerminalHFSS > Results > Create Terminal
Solution Data Report > Rectangular PlotSolution Data Report > Rectangular PlotSolution Data Report > Rectangular PlotSolution Data Report > Rectangular Plot
1. Solution: Setup1: AdaptiveSetup1: AdaptiveSetup1: AdaptiveSetup1: Adaptive
2. Click the XXXX tab
1. X: Pass: Pass: Pass: Pass
3. Click the YYYY tab
2. Quantity: St(T1,T1), St(T1,T2),St(T1,T1), St(T1,T2),St(T1,T1), St(T1,T2),St(T1,T1), St(T1,T2),

Training Manual
6.2-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. X: Freq: Freq: Freq: Freq

Training Manual
6.2-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot ---- PhasePhasePhasePhase
1. X: Freq: Freq: Freq: Freq
3. Function: ang_degang_degang_degang_deg

Training Manual
6.2-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
Select the menu item Window >Window >Window >Window > hfss_coaxhfss_coaxhfss_coaxhfss_coax –––– HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1 ---- ModelerModelerModelerModeler
To create a field plot:To create a field plot:To create a field plot:To create a field plot:
1. Select the Global YZ Plane
1. Using the Model Tree, expand PlanesPlanesPlanesPlanes
2. Select Global:YZGlobal:YZGlobal:YZGlobal:YZ
3. In Volume: All ObjectsAll ObjectsAll ObjectsAll Objects
To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Modify Plot AttributesHFSS > Fields > Modify Plot AttributesHFSS > Fields > Modify Plot AttributesHFSS > Fields > Modify Plot Attributes
2. Select Plot Folder Window:
1. Select: E FieldE FieldE FieldE Field
3. E-Field Window:
1. Click the ScaleScaleScaleScale tab
1. Select Use LimitsUse LimitsUse LimitsUse Limits
2. Min: 1.01.01.01.0
3. Max: 1000.01000.01000.01000.0
4. Scale: LogLogLogLog

Training Manual
6.2-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Edit SourcesEdit SourcesEdit SourcesEdit Sources
To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:To Modify a Terminal excitation:
2. Select T2T2T2T2 from the Edit Sources window
Check the TerminatedTerminatedTerminatedTerminated box
To Select the Electric Field plot:To Select the Electric Field plot:To Select the Electric Field plot:To Select the Electric Field plot:
1. Expand the Project tree
2. Expand the Field OverlaysField OverlaysField OverlaysField Overlays
3. Click on the E FieldE FieldE FieldE Field or Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1 to
display the field plot
2. In the Swept VariableSwept VariableSwept VariableSwept Variable tab, accept defaults settings:
4. Steps: 9999
5. Click: OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
6.3-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – 180° Ring Hybrid
The 180° Ring Hybrid
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and analyze a ring
hybrid, using Ansoft HFSS.

Training Manual
6.3-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
select the Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11Ansoft, HFSS 11 program group. Click HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11HFSS 11.
Auto-assign terminals on ports:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
6.3-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.3-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Using the Modeler Materials picklist in the toolbar, choose SelectSelectSelectSelect
1. Click the Add MaterialAdd MaterialAdd MaterialAdd Material button
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_SubMy_SubMy_SubMy_Sub
3. For the ValueValueValueValue of Dielectric Loss TangentDielectric Loss TangentDielectric Loss TangentDielectric Loss Tangent type: 4.29e4.29e4.29e4.29e----4444

Training Manual
6.3-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item Draw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular Polyhedron
2. Press the TabTabTabTab key to move the cursor to the coordinate entry fields
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: ----1.1431.1431.1431.143, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180),22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180),22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180),22.345mm/cos(30*pi/180), dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
5. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the height
dX: 0.00.00.00.0 dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 2.2862.2862.2862.286, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
6. Segment Number Window
Number of Segments: 6666
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: SubstrateSubstrateSubstrateSubstrate
To change the transparency of the substrate object:To change the transparency of the substrate object:To change the transparency of the substrate object:To change the transparency of the substrate object:
1. Click the button labeled 0000 next to the TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent attribute.
2. Change the value to 0.80.80.80.8
3. Click OKOKOKOK to dismiss the Transparency
4. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
6.3-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create TraceCreate TraceCreate TraceCreate Trace
To create the trace:To create the trace:To create the trace:To create the trace:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: TraceTraceTraceTrace
1. Select the objects named: TraceTraceTraceTrace
1. Name: PerfE_TracePerfE_TracePerfE_TracePerfE_Trace

Training Manual
6.3-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Note:Note:Note:Note: This structure requires 4 ports with 1 terminal lines per port. We could use
face selection to select the ends of the substrate that represent the port, define
terminal lines, assign excitation, and repeat for port2-4. Since we can duplicate
port definitions, it is more efficient to define a rectangle with the appropriate port
definition and copy it to the location of ports 2-4. The second method is
described here:
To set grid planeTo set grid planeTo set grid planeTo set grid plane
To set the viewTo set the viewTo set the viewTo set the view
Select the menu item View > Modify Attributes > OrientationView > Modify Attributes > OrientationView > Modify Attributes > OrientationView > Modify Attributes > Orientation
Select Viewing Direction form the List Window
1. From the list select the view name: RightRightRightRight
2. Click the ApplyApplyApplyApply button
To create the rectangle graphically:To create the rectangle graphically:To create the rectangle graphically:To create the rectangle graphically:
2. Using the mouse, position the active position indicator such that it snaps to
the vertex of the lower left corner of the substrate face. The shape of the
active position indicator will change to a square when it snaps to the vertex
3. Click the left mouse button to select this point as the start position.
4. Continued on next page…

Training Manual
6.3-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
4. Using the mouse, position the active position indicator such that it snaps to
the vertex of the upper right corner of the substrate face. The shape of the
active position indicator will change to a square when it snaps to the vertex
5. Click the left mouse button to set the opposite corner of the rectangle.
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: PortPortPortPort

Training Manual
6.3-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the objects named: PortPortPortPort
4. Reference Conductors Dialog
1. Conducting Objects: Trace
2. Reference Conductors: <Empty>
Trace Object
Wave Port Face

Training Manual
6.3-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the remaining Traces and Wave PortsCreate the remaining Traces and Wave PortsCreate the remaining Traces and Wave PortsCreate the remaining Traces and Wave Ports
To select objects:To select objects:To select objects:To select objects:
1. Select the objects named: Trace, PortTrace, PortTrace, PortTrace, Port
To duplicate the objects:To duplicate the objects:To duplicate the objects:To duplicate the objects:
1. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around Axis
2. Duplicate Around Axis Window
1. Axis: ZZZZ
2. Angle: 60deg60deg60deg60deg
Create Outer RingCreate Outer RingCreate Outer RingCreate Outer Ring
1. Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XY
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the position
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: OuterOuterOuterOuter
1. Select the menu item View > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit Drawing....

Training Manual
6.3-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group the ConductorsGroup the ConductorsGroup the ConductorsGroup the Conductors
1. Deselect all objects by selecting the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All
2. Using the model tree, while holding down the CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key, select the following
objects in this order: Trace, Trace_1, Trace_2, Trace_3, OuterTrace, Trace_1, Trace_2, Trace_3, OuterTrace, Trace_1, Trace_2, Trace_3, OuterTrace, Trace_1, Trace_2, Trace_3, Outer
1. The Trace object needs to be selected first as the Boolean
operations are order dependent, and the Perfect E boundary should
propagate to the other objects.
1. Select the menu item View > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit Drawing....
Create Inner RingCreate Inner RingCreate Inner RingCreate Inner Ring
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the position
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: InnerInnerInnerInner
Select objects:Select objects:Select objects:Select objects:
1. Deselect all objects by selecting the menu item Edit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect AllEdit > Deselect All
2. Using the model tree, while holding down the CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key, select the following
objects in this order: Trace, InnerTrace, InnerTrace, InnerTrace, Inner
3. Select the menu item, Modeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > SubtractModeler > Boolean > Subtract
4. Subtract Window
1. Blank Parts: TraceTraceTraceTrace
2. Tool Parts: InnerInnerInnerInner
3. Clone tool objects before subtracting:::: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
1. Select the menu item View > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit DrawingView > Fit Drawing.... Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D key

Training Manual
6.3-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.010.010.010.01
2. Frequency Setup Type: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step
Start: 2.0 GHz2.0 GHz2.0 GHz2.0 GHz
Stop: 7.0 GHz: 7.0 GHz: 7.0 GHz: 7.0 GHz
Step: 0.05 GHz: 0.05 GHz: 0.05 GHz: 0.05 GHz

Training Manual
6.3-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
1. Solution: Setup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePass
3. Quantity: St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),
St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) (hold down
the CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key to select multiple quantities)

Training Manual
6.3-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3. Quantity: St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2),
St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T3), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T4) (hold down
the CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key to select multiple quantities)

Training Manual
6.3-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_ringhybridhfss_ringhybridhfss_ringhybridhfss_ringhybrid
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
6.3-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.3-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Terminal STerminal STerminal STerminal S----Parameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive Pass
Terminal STerminal STerminal STerminal S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot ---- MagnitudeMagnitudeMagnitudeMagnitude

Training Manual
6.4-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Coax Stub Resonator
The Coaxial Stub Resonator
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and optimize a
coaxial stub resonator, using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
6.4-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
create this passive device model:
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: CylindersCylindersCylindersCylinders
Boolean: UniteUniteUniteUnite
Duplicate: Around AxisAround AxisAround AxisAround Axis
Excitations: Wave PortsWave PortsWave PortsWave Ports
Analysis
Sweep: Fast FrequencyFast FrequencyFast FrequencyFast Frequency
Optimization
ParametricsParametricsParametricsParametrics SetupSetupSetupSetup
OptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetrics SetupSetupSetupSetup
Results
Data: TabularTabularTabularTabular
Plotting: CartesianCartesianCartesianCartesian

Training Manual
6.4-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started

Training Manual
6.4-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.4-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:

Training Manual
6.4-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: ----6.06.06.06.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
1. Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ConductorConductorConductorConductor

Training Manual
6.4-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the StubCreate the StubCreate the StubCreate the Stub
To create the stubTo create the stubTo create the stubTo create the stub
To parameterize the object:To parameterize the object:To parameterize the object:To parameterize the object:
1. Select the CommandCommandCommandCommand tab from the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window
2. For HeightHeightHeightHeight, type: LLLL, Click the TabTabTabTab key to accept
Add Variable LLLL: 4.75mm4.75mm4.75mm4.75mm, Click the OKOKOKOK button
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: StubStubStubStub

Training Manual
6.4-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the BodyCreate the BodyCreate the BodyCreate the Body
To create the bodyTo create the bodyTo create the bodyTo create the body
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: BodyBodyBodyBody
To select surface for Wave Port 1To select surface for Wave Port 1To select surface for Wave Port 1To select surface for Wave Port 1
1. Press the FFFF key on keyboard ( Select Faces mode)
2. Click on the end surface of BodyBodyBodyBody as shown
To assign reference conductors for TerminalsTo assign reference conductors for TerminalsTo assign reference conductors for TerminalsTo assign reference conductors for Terminals
1. Select the menu item HFSS>Excitations>Assign>Wave PortHFSS>Excitations>Assign>Wave PortHFSS>Excitations>Assign>Wave PortHFSS>Excitations>Assign>Wave Port
2. In the pop up Reference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for TerminalsReference Conductors for Terminals window, leave
ConductorConductorConductorConductor in Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects.Conducting Objects. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
6.4-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Port 2 ArmCreate Port 2 ArmCreate Port 2 ArmCreate Port 2 Arm
To select the objects Conductor & BodyTo select the objects Conductor & BodyTo select the objects Conductor & BodyTo select the objects Conductor & Body
1. Select the objects named: Body, ConductorBody, ConductorBody, ConductorBody, Conductor
Note:Note:Note:Note: Use the Ctrl + Left mouse button to select multiple objects
To create the port 2 arm:To create the port 2 arm:To create the port 2 arm:To create the port 2 arm:
1. Axis: XXXX
2. Angle: -90909090
Create Stub BodyCreate Stub BodyCreate Stub BodyCreate Stub Body
Duplicate boundaries with geometry:::: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
To select the objects Body:To select the objects Body:To select the objects Body:To select the objects Body:
1. Select the objects named: BodyBodyBodyBody

Training Manual
6.4-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create the stub body:To create the stub body:To create the stub body:To create the stub body:
1. Select the menu Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around Axis.
1. Axis: XXXX
2. Angle: 180180180180
Group the Body ObjectsGroup the Body ObjectsGroup the Body ObjectsGroup the Body Objects
To select the objects Body, Body_1, Body_2:To select the objects Body, Body_1, Body_2:To select the objects Body, Body_1, Body_2:To select the objects Body, Body_1, Body_2:
1. Select the objects named: Body, Body_1, Body_2Body, Body_1, Body_2Body, Body_1, Body_2Body, Body_1, Body_2
Group the Conductor & Stub ObjectsGroup the Conductor & Stub ObjectsGroup the Conductor & Stub ObjectsGroup the Conductor & Stub Objects
To select the objects Conductor, Conductor_1, Stub:To select the objects Conductor, Conductor_1, Stub:To select the objects Conductor, Conductor_1, Stub:To select the objects Conductor, Conductor_1, Stub:
1. Select the objects named: Conductor, Conductor_1, StubConductor, Conductor_1, StubConductor, Conductor_1, StubConductor, Conductor_1, Stub

Training Manual
6.4-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.
Mesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh OperationsMesh Operations
To select the object BodyTo select the object BodyTo select the object BodyTo select the object Body
1. Select the objects named: BodyBodyBodyBody
To create a mesh operation:To create a mesh operation:To create a mesh operation:To create a mesh operation:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Mesh Operations > Assign > InsideHFSS > Mesh Operations > Assign > InsideHFSS > Mesh Operations > Assign > InsideHFSS > Mesh Operations > Assign > Inside
Selection > Length basedSelection > Length basedSelection > Length basedSelection > Length based
2. Element Length Based Refinement Window:
1. Name: Body_Mesh: Body_Mesh: Body_Mesh: Body_Mesh
2. Restrict Length of Elements:::: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
3. Restrict the Number of Elements: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
1. Maximum Number of Elements: 2000200020002000

Training Manual
6.4-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
2. Frequency Setup Type: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step
Start: 5.0 GHz5.0 GHz5.0 GHz5.0 GHz
Stop: 20.0 GHz: 20.0 GHz: 20.0 GHz: 20.0 GHz
Step: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz

Training Manual
6.4-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_stub_resonatorhfss_stub_resonatorhfss_stub_resonatorhfss_stub_resonator
Analyze
Manager.
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analyze allHFSS > Analyze allHFSS > Analyze allHFSS > Analyze all

Training Manual
6.4-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.4-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Quantity: St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1),St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1),St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1),St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T1),
St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)
Data MarkersData MarkersData MarkersData Markers
Mark All TracesMark All TracesMark All TracesMark All Traces
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select AllEdit > Select AllEdit > Select AllEdit > Select All
2. Select the menu item Report 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add MinimumReport 2D > Marker > Add Minimum
3. When you are finished, select the menu item Report 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > ClearReport 2D > Marker > Clear
AllAllAllAll to remove the marker.

Training Manual
6.4-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Optimetrics Setup – Parametric Sweep
During the design of a microwave device, it is common practice to develop
design trends based on swept parameters. Ansoft HFSS with Optimetrics
Parametric Sweep can automatically create these design curves.
Add a Parametric SweepAdd a Parametric SweepAdd a Parametric SweepAdd a Parametric Sweep
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add ParametricHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add Parametric
2. Setup Sweep AnalysisSweep AnalysisSweep AnalysisSweep Analysis Window:
1. Click the Sweep DefinitionsSweep DefinitionsSweep DefinitionsSweep Definitions tab::::
1. Click the AddAddAddAdd button
2. Add/Edit Sweep Dialog
1. Select Variable: LLLL
2. Select Linear CountLinear CountLinear CountLinear Count
3. Start: 4.0mm4.0mm4.0mm4.0mm
4. Stop: 5.5mm5.5mm5.5mm5.5mm
5. Count: 5555
1. Save Fields and Mesh: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Analyze Parametric SweepAnalyze Parametric SweepAnalyze Parametric SweepAnalyze Parametric Sweep
1. Expand the Project Tree to display the items listed under OptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetrics
2. Right-click the mouse on ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1ParametricSetup1 and choose AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze
Optimetrics ResultsOptimetrics ResultsOptimetrics ResultsOptimetrics Results
To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics Results
2. Select the ProfileProfileProfileProfile Tab to view the solution progress for each setup.
3. Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when you are finished viewing the results

Training Manual
6.4-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot –––– S12 at each LS12 at each LS12 at each LS12 at each L
3. Click the FamiliesFamiliesFamiliesFamilies tab
1. Sweeps: Variable LLLL will Value AllAllAllAll
1. Primary Sweep: Freq: AllFreq: AllFreq: AllFreq: All
3. Quantity: St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)

Training Manual
6.4-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Optimetrics Setup – Optimization
The Parametric Sweep was useful for generating design curves. For this simple
design with only a single variable we could use the design curves to make
educated guesses at performance targets that are not contained in the
Parametric Sweep. Ansoft HFSS and Optimetrics with Optimization takes the
guess work out of achieving performance targets. To demonstrate this we will
target a minimum S12 at 13GHz. Since this device has a very high Q, we will
consider anything <= -40dB at 13GHz to be a minimum. From the Parametric
Sweep, we can see that the search range can be limited to the range 4.7-5.1mm.
Since we are only interested in obtaining an optimum solution for 13GHz, we will
add an additional Solution Setup that does not include the frequency sweep.
This will reduce the amount of simulation time required to achieve the
performance goal.
Add an Analysis SetupAdd an Analysis SetupAdd an Analysis SetupAdd an Analysis Setup
Define Optimization Design VariablesDefine Optimization Design VariablesDefine Optimization Design VariablesDefine Optimization Design Variables
To Define Optimization Design VariableTo Define Optimization Design VariableTo Define Optimization Design VariableTo Define Optimization Design Variable
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Design PropertiesHFSS > Design PropertiesHFSS > Design PropertiesHFSS > Design Properties
2. Click the OptimizationOptimizationOptimizationOptimization radio button::::
1. Name: LLLL
2. Include: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
3. Min: 4.0 mm4.0 mm4.0 mm4.0 mm
4. Max: 5.5 mm5.5 mm5.5 mm5.5 mm

Training Manual
6.4-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Add Optimization SetupAdd Optimization SetupAdd Optimization SetupAdd Optimization Setup
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add OptimizationHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add OptimizationHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add OptimizationHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Add Optimization
2. Setup Optimization Window:
1. Click the GoalsGoalsGoalsGoals tab:
2. Optimizer: QuasiQuasiQuasiQuasi----NewtonNewtonNewtonNewton
3. Max. No. of Iterations: 10101010
4. Click the Setup CalculationsSetup CalculationsSetup CalculationsSetup Calculations button
5. Setup Output Variables dialog:
2. Quantity: St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)St(Conductor_T1,Conductor_T2)
4. Click the Add CalculationAdd CalculationAdd CalculationAdd Calculation button
6. From the Solution Column, click on the Setup1:Sweep1Setup1:Sweep1Setup1:Sweep1Setup1:Sweep1 and select
Setup2:LastAdaptiveSetup2:LastAdaptiveSetup2:LastAdaptiveSetup2:LastAdaptive from the list of solutions
7. Condition: <=<=<=<=
8. Click on Edit Goal/WeightEdit Goal/WeightEdit Goal/WeightEdit Goal/Weight button
1. Goal Value:0.010.010.010.01
2. Click on WeightWeightWeightWeight tab,
3. Set All Weight to 1,1,1,1,
4. Click on SetSetSetSet button
9. Acceptable Cost: 0000
10. Click the VariablesVariablesVariablesVariables tab:
1. Min: 4.7 mm4.7 mm4.7 mm4.7 mm
2. Max: 5.1mm5.1mm5.1mm5.1mm
1. Parametrics Analysis: click on N/AN/AN/AN/A and select ParamatricParamatricParamatricParamatric
Setup1Setup1Setup1Setup1
2. Select Parametric Sweep before OptimizationParametric Sweep before OptimizationParametric Sweep before OptimizationParametric Sweep before Optimization

Training Manual
6.4-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analyze OptimizationAnalyze OptimizationAnalyze OptimizationAnalyze Optimization
2. Right-click the mouse on OptimizationSetup1OptimizationSetup1OptimizationSetup1OptimizationSetup1 and choose AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze
Optimetrics ResultsOptimetrics ResultsOptimetrics ResultsOptimetrics Results
To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:To view the Optimetrics Results:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics ResultsHFSS > Optimetrics Analysis > Optimetrics Results
2. Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when you are finished viewing the results

Training Manual
6.4-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter Plot of Optimum ResultParameter Plot of Optimum ResultParameter Plot of Optimum ResultParameter Plot of Optimum Result
Select the menu HFSS>HFSS>HFSS>HFSS> OptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetricsOptimetrics Analysis >Analysis >Analysis >Analysis > OptimericsOptimericsOptimericsOptimerics ResultsResultsResultsResults
View: select TableTableTableTable
Select the iteration with optimal result: the lowest cost (cost =0)
Click on ApplyApplyApplyApply button
To analyze the optimum designTo analyze the optimum designTo analyze the optimum designTo analyze the optimum design
1. Right click Setup1Setup1Setup1Setup1 under AnalysisAnalysisAnalysisAnalysis in the project tree, and click AnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyzeAnalyze
To view the plotTo view the plotTo view the plotTo view the plot
The existing XY Plot 1XY Plot 1XY Plot 1XY Plot 1 will automatically be updated when the solution
completes.
To change to the XY Plot 1 window, select the menu item Window > XYWindow > XYWindow > XYWindow > XY
Plot 1.Plot 1.Plot 1.Plot 1.

Training Manual
6.5-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Microstrip Wave Port
Microstrip Wave Port
This example is intended to show you how wave port size can influence the
results of any simulation using the Ansoft HFSS Version Design Environment.

Training Manual
6.5-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Ansoft Design Environment
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Boxes, RectangleBoxes, RectangleBoxes, RectangleBoxes, Rectangle
Boolean Operations: Duplicate Along LineDuplicate Along LineDuplicate Along LineDuplicate Along Line
Boundary/Excitation
Ports: Wave Ports and Integration LinesWave Ports and Integration LinesWave Ports and Integration LinesWave Ports and Integration Lines
Analysis
Solution: Ports OnlyPorts OnlyPorts OnlyPorts Only
Sweep: InterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolating
Results
Fields Overlays
Port Field DisplayPort Field DisplayPort Field DisplayPort Field Display

Training Manual
6.5-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started

Training Manual
6.5-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Generally speaking when we assign a wave port to a microstrip line, or any
quasi-TEM line, we need to include some area around the actual transmission
line. The big question is, “how much area?”
Below you will see the cross section of a simple microstrip line with naming
conventions shown.
As a rule of thumb, we typically create a 2D rectangle to represent the wave port
stimulus for this type of structure. The dimensions of the rectangle are roughly
ten times the width of the transmission line by eight times the height of the
substrate.
REMEMBER: These are only guidelines !!!
The height of the port will be affected by the permittivity of the substrate. The
higher the permittivity, the less the fields will propagate in the air, and the shorter
the port can be made.
~10w
w
h
~8h
The width of the port will affect the port impedance and
propagating modes. The narrower the width (image on
right), the more the fields will couple to the side walls of
the port. This effect may not be physical. The wider the
port, the greater chance that a higher frequency
waveguide mode can propagate.
This example will explore this last phenomenon.

Training Manual
6.5-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. In the Ansoft HFSS desktop, a new project is automatically inserted.
2. When a new project is automatically opened, a new HFSS Design is also
automatically inserted into the project.
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: milmilmilmil

Training Manual
6.5-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Material Name: My_RogersMy_RogersMy_RogersMy_Rogers
2. Relative Permittivity: 3.383.383.383.38

Training Manual
6.5-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: ----400.0400.0400.0400.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the box:

Training Manual
6.5-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.5-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create the Air:To create the Air:To create the Air:To create the Air:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: ----400.0400.0400.0400.0, Z: ----1.41.41.41.4, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
To select the object Air:To select the object Air:To select the object Air:To select the object Air:
2. Radiation Boundary Window
Name: Rad1Rad1Rad1Rad1

Training Manual
6.5-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the Wave PortCreate the Wave PortCreate the Wave PortCreate the Wave Port
To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:
X: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, Y:::: ----200.0200.0200.0200.0, Z: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 400.0: 400.0: 400.0: 400.0, dZ: 50: 50: 50: 50.0000, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For PositionPositionPositionPosition, type: 0mil,0mil,0mil,0mil, ----Port_Width/2, 0milPort_Width/2, 0milPort_Width/2, 0milPort_Width/2, 0mil, Click the TabTabTabTab key to accept
Add Variable Port_WidthPort_WidthPort_WidthPort_Width: 400mil400mil400mil400mil, Click the OKOKOKOK button
3. For YSizeYSizeYSizeYSize, type: Port_WidthPort_WidthPort_WidthPort_Width, Click the TabTabTabTab key to accept

Training Manual
6.5-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign the Excitation 1Assign the Excitation 1Assign the Excitation 1Assign the Excitation 1
1. Name: p1p1p1p1,
1. Number of Modes: 5555
2. For Mode 1111, click the NoneNoneNoneNone in the IntegrationIntegrationIntegrationIntegration LineLineLineLine column and
select New LineNew LineNew LineNew Line
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vector position
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vertex
dX: 0.0, dY: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 0.0, dZ: 8.0,8.0,8.0,8.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
For Mode 1111, click the ZpiZpiZpiZpi column and select ZpvZpvZpvZpv

Training Manual
6.5-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To duplicate the port:To duplicate the port:To duplicate the port:To duplicate the port:
1. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along Line
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the first point of the duplicate vector
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the second point of the duplicate
vector
4. Duplicate Along Line Windows

Training Manual
6.5-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.

Training Manual
6.5-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Solution Frequency: 20GHz: 20GHz: 20GHz: 20GHz
2. Check Solve Ports OnlySolve Ports OnlySolve Ports OnlySolve Ports Only
1. Sweep Type: Interpolating
Count: 81: 81: 81: 81

Training Manual
6.5-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_waveportshfss_waveportshfss_waveportshfss_waveports
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
6.5-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Check the GammaGammaGammaGamma radio button
2. Uncheck the ZoZoZoZo radio button
3. Click the pulldown that displays Sweep1Sweep1Sweep1Sweep1, and change to PortOnlyPortOnlyPortOnlyPortOnly

Training Manual
6.5-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Propagation Constant vs. FrequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. FrequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. FrequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. Frequency
To Create a report:To Create a report:To Create a report:To Create a report:
2. New Traces Window::::
3. Category: GammaGammaGammaGamma
4. Quantity: Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:3),Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:3),Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:3),Gamma(p1:1),Gamma(p1:2), Gamma(p1:3),
Gamma(p1:4), Gamma(p1:5)Gamma(p1:4), Gamma(p1:5)Gamma(p1:4), Gamma(p1:5)Gamma(p1:4), Gamma(p1:5)
5. Function: imimimim
8. See next page for plot and discussion of results

Training Manual
6.5-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
DiscussionDiscussionDiscussionDiscussion
What does this plot tell us?
Given the physical size of the wave port object that we created, the fundamental
mode (p2:1) is a quasi-TEM mode that propagates from DC on up.
This also shows that higher order modes can propagate (β>0) at a high enough
frequency. The second modes starts propagating at ~14 GHz.
Therefore, if we only needed to simulate up to 10 GHz, we wouldn’t need to size
our port any different, however, if we need to simulate up to 50 GHz, then we
need to resize our port to eliminate the higher order propagating modes.
The last part of the exercise will explore this.

Training Manual
6.5-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Pattern Plots
Select the menu item Window >Window >Window >Window > hfss_waveportshfss_waveportshfss_waveportshfss_waveports –––– HFSSdesign1HFSSdesign1HFSSdesign1HFSSdesign1 ---- ModelerModelerModelerModeler
It might be illuminating to look at the field patterns at the port to discover which
modes are excited.
To display the Mode field patterns in the modeler:To display the Mode field patterns in the modeler:To display the Mode field patterns in the modeler:To display the Mode field patterns in the modeler:
1. From within the project manager, expand the section Port Field DisplayPort Field DisplayPort Field DisplayPort Field Display
2. Expand p1p1p1p1, and select Mode 2Mode 2Mode 2Mode 2
1. The field pattern will be overlaid on the 3D model. From the plot
below, Mode 2 is clearly not a microstrip mode, but a TE10-like
waveguide mode.

Training Manual
6.5-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Variable: Port_WidthPort_WidthPort_WidthPort_Width
2. Select Linear StepLinear StepLinear StepLinear Step
3. Start: 200mil200mil200mil200mil
4. Stop: 600mil600mil600mil600mil
5. Step: 100mil100mil100mil100mil
6. Click the AddAddAddAdd >>>>>>>> button

Training Manual
6.5-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > SaveFile > SaveFile > SaveFile > Save.
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
6.5-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Propagation Constant vs. Frequency vs. Port_WidthCreate Propagation Constant vs. Frequency vs. Port_WidthCreate Propagation Constant vs. Frequency vs. Port_WidthCreate Propagation Constant vs. Frequency vs. Port_Width
4. Quantity: Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),
8. See next page for plot and discussion of results

Training Manual
6.5-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
DiscussionDiscussionDiscussionDiscussion
What does this plot tell us?
This shows that as we decrease the width of the port, the frequency at which the
higher order mode starts to propagate increases.
Therefore, by properly sizing the wave port, you can eliminate any higher order
propagating modes if you believe that they do not exist.
You need to use caution if you are simulating very high frequencies, i.e.,
millimeter wavelengths, as you may not be able to make the ports small enough
to eliminate these modes. You probably shouldn’t even try as the higher order
modes might represent real world effects.

Training Manual
6.5-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Propagation Constant vs. Port Width at a fixed frequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. Port Width at a fixed frequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. Port Width at a fixed frequencyCreate Propagation Constant vs. Port Width at a fixed frequency
1. Solution: Setup1: PortOnlySetup1: PortOnlySetup1: PortOnlySetup1: PortOnly
3. X: PortWidthPortWidthPortWidthPortWidth
5. Quantity: Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),Gamma(p1:2),

Training Manual
6.5-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports

Training Manual
6.6-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Ferrite Circulator
The Waveguide Circulator
waveguide ferrite circulator, using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment, and
Ansoft Maxwell Design Environment.
This example will utilize Maxwell to calculate the magnetic field bias in the ferrite
core, and then HFSS will utilize this non-uniform bias distribution to solve the
microwave circulator.
We will start off by creating the ferrite object and electro-magnet in Maxwell, and
then adding the circulator objects within HFSS.
Waveguide:Waveguide:Waveguide:Waveguide:
Width = 0.9 inWidth = 0.9 inWidth = 0.9 inWidth = 0.9 in
Height = 0.4 inHeight = 0.4 inHeight = 0.4 inHeight = 0.4 in
Length =Length =Length =Length = 2 in2 in2 in2 in

Training Manual
6.6-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Solid Modeling
Boolean Operations: Unite, DuplicateUnite, DuplicateUnite, DuplicateUnite, Duplicate
Excitations
Analysis
Sweep: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency: Interpolating Frequency
Results
Fields
3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations3D Field Plots, Animations
Ansoft Maxwell Design Environment
The following features of the Ansoft Maxwell Design Environment are used to
3D Solid Modeling
Boolean Operations: Unite, Duplicate, SubtractUnite, Duplicate, SubtractUnite, Duplicate, SubtractUnite, Duplicate, Subtract
Excitations
Terminal: CurrentCurrentCurrentCurrent
Analysis
Magnetostatic
Fields
3D Field Plots3D Field Plots3D Field Plots3D Field Plots

Training Manual
6.6-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
Launching Ansoft MaxwellLaunching Ansoft MaxwellLaunching Ansoft MaxwellLaunching Ansoft Maxwell
1. To access Ansoft Maxwell, click the Microsoft StartStartStartStart button, select ProgramsProgramsProgramsPrograms, and
select the Ansoft, Maxwell 12Ansoft, Maxwell 12Ansoft, Maxwell 12Ansoft, Maxwell 12 program group. Click Maxwell 12Maxwell 12Maxwell 12Maxwell 12.
By default, when Maxwell first starts up, a new project will beBy default, when Maxwell first starts up, a new project will beBy default, when Maxwell first starts up, a new project will beBy default, when Maxwell first starts up, a new project will be opened.opened.opened.opened.
If you have been working in Maxwell and need to open a new projeIf you have been working in Maxwell and need to open a new projeIf you have been working in Maxwell and need to open a new projeIf you have been working in Maxwell and need to open a new project:ct:ct:ct:
1. In an Ansoft Maxwell window, click the On the Standard toolbar, or
select the menu item File > NewFile > NewFile > NewFile > New.
Inserting a New DesignInserting a New DesignInserting a New DesignInserting a New Design
We need to insert a new 3D design for the ferrite bias model.
Select Project > Insert Maxwell 3D DesignProject > Insert Maxwell 3D DesignProject > Insert Maxwell 3D DesignProject > Insert Maxwell 3D Design
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Solution TypeMaxwell 3D > Solution TypeMaxwell 3D > Solution TypeMaxwell 3D > Solution Type
1. Choose MagnetostaticMagnetostaticMagnetostaticMagnetostatic

Training Manual
6.6-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials picklist in the toolbar, choose SelectSelectSelectSelect
2. In the material definition dialog, enter steelsteelsteelsteel in the search box, and select
the steel_1010steel_1010steel_1010steel_1010 material from the list.
Create Magnet CoreCreate Magnet CoreCreate Magnet CoreCreate Magnet Core
To create side1:To create side1:To create side1:To create side1:
rectangle:
dX: ----0.50.50.50.5, dY: 0.50.50.50.5, dZ: -0.5,0.5,0.5,0.5, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: core1_acore1_acore1_acore1_a

Training Manual
6.6-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Creating the 3D Model (cont’d)
To continue side1:To continue side1:To continue side1:To continue side1:
rectangle:
dX: ----0.50.50.50.5, dY: 0.50.50.50.5, dZ: ----1.5,1.5,1.5,1.5, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: core1_bcore1_bcore1_bcore1_b

Training Manual
6.6-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To duplicate side1:To duplicate side1:To duplicate side1:To duplicate side1:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible or simply press Ctrl + ACtrl + ACtrl + ACtrl + A
2. Select Edit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around Axis
Axis: ZZZZ,
Angle: 180 degrees: 180 degrees: 180 degrees: 180 degrees
Total Number: 2222
Press the OKOKOKOK key

Training Manual
6.6-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create base:To create base:To create base:To create base:
X: ----0.250.250.250.25, Y: ----0.750.750.750.75, Z: ----1.251.251.251.25 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: core_basecore_basecore_basecore_base

Training Manual
6.6-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To unite objects:To unite objects:To unite objects:To unite objects:
2. Select Modeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > UniteModeler > Boolean > Unite
2. In the material definition dialog, enter coppercoppercoppercopper in the search box, and select
the coppercoppercoppercopper material from the list.
Create CoilCreate CoilCreate CoilCreate Coil
To create coil:To create coil:To create coil:To create coil:
X: 0.30.30.30.3, Y: ----0.3750.3750.3750.375, Z: ----0.70.70.70.7 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
dX: ----0.60.60.60.6 dY: 0.750.750.750.75, dZ: ----0.6,0.6,0.6,0.6, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: coilcoilcoilcoil

Training Manual
6.6-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Coil (contCreate Coil (contCreate Coil (contCreate Coil (cont’’’’d)d)d)d)
To subtract the core from the coilTo subtract the core from the coilTo subtract the core from the coilTo subtract the core from the coil
3. The object core1_acore1_acore1_acore1_a should be on the Tool partsTool partsTool partsTool parts side
Select object core1_acore1_acore1_acore1_a from the Blank PartsBlank PartsBlank PartsBlank Parts side, and press the
arrow pointing right
4. The object coilcoilcoilcoil should be on the Blank PartsBlank PartsBlank PartsBlank Parts side
Select object coilcoilcoilcoil from the Tool PartsTool PartsTool PartsTool Parts side, and press the arrow
pointing left
5. Select the option to Clone tool objects before subtractingClone tool objects before subtractingClone tool objects before subtractingClone tool objects before subtracting
6. Before pressing OKOKOKOK, make sure the dialog looks as below:
7. Press the OKOKOKOK button

Training Manual
6.6-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. In the material definition dialog, click on the Add MaterialAdd MaterialAdd MaterialAdd Material button
3. Under the Relative PermeabilityRelative PermeabilityRelative PermeabilityRelative Permeability type column, select SimpleSimpleSimpleSimple, and then
choose NonlinearNonlinearNonlinearNonlinear from the pulldown.
4. Click on the BBBB----H CurveH CurveH CurveH Curve button for the Relative Permeability
5. This opens up a new dialog where values describing the B-H curve for the
ferrite will be entered.
6. Using the fields on the left side of the dialog, enter the following values
H: 0000, B: 0000
H: 150150150150, B: 0.1250.1250.1250.125
H: 160160160160: B: 0.130.130.130.13
H: 10160101601016010160, B: 0.14256640.14256640.14256640.1425664
You can use the TabTabTabTab key and EnterEnterEnterEnter key to cycle through these
values
The units should be:
H: A_per_meter
B: tesla
7. Click OK to accept these changes to the B-H curve
8. Change the material name to TT1-109
9. Click OKOKOKOK to accept this material
10. Click OKOKOKOK to exit material library window

Training Manual
6.6-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Terminal objectCreate Terminal objectCreate Terminal objectCreate Terminal object
To create terminal current object:To create terminal current object:To create terminal current object:To create terminal current object:
1. From the Drawing Plane toolbar pulldown, select the XYXYXYXYplane
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center of the base
X: 0.250.250.250.25, Y: ----0.3750.3750.3750.375, Z: ----1111 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
5. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the size of the rectangle
dX: 0.050.050.050.05, dY: 0.750.750.750.75, dZ: 0000 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: terminalterminalterminalterminal
Assign the Current biasAssign the Current biasAssign the Current biasAssign the Current bias
To assign the current to the selected object:To assign the current to the selected object:To assign the current to the selected object:To assign the current to the selected object:
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Excitations > Assign > CurrentMaxwell 3D > Excitations > Assign > CurrentMaxwell 3D > Excitations > Assign > CurrentMaxwell 3D > Excitations > Assign > Current
2. Enter the value bias_currentbias_currentbias_currentbias_current in the entry for current and press EnterEnterEnterEnter
3. This will bring up a dialog requesting the value of the newly created
variable, bias_currentbias_currentbias_currentbias_current. Enter 200A200A200A200A for the variable value, including the unit
factor “A”
4. Click OKOKOKOK to accept this value.

Training Manual
6.6-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create FerriteCreate FerriteCreate FerriteCreate Ferrite
To create ferrite:To create ferrite:To create ferrite:To create ferrite:
1. From the Drawing Plane toolbar pulldown, select the ZXZXZXZX plane
2. Select the menu item Draw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular PolyhedronDraw > Regular Polyhedron
4. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the center of the base
X: 0000, Y: ----0.20.20.20.2, Z: ----0000 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
5. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radius
dX: 0000, dY: 0000, dZ: 0.2050.2050.2050.205 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
6. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter height
dX: 0000, dY: 0.40.40.40.4, dZ: 0,0,0,0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
7. Number of segments: 3333
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ferriteferriteferriteferrite
Assigning Boundary Conditions
Assign Insulating Boundary conditionAssign Insulating Boundary conditionAssign Insulating Boundary conditionAssign Insulating Boundary condition
To select faces:To select faces:To select faces:To select faces:
3. From the Object NameObject NameObject NameObject Name side of the dialog, select the coilcoilcoilcoil object
4. From the Face IDFace IDFace IDFace ID side of the dialog, hold the CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key and click on only
those face IDs which represent the interior faces of the coil object
1. NOTE: The numbers may be different than those shown below
5. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
6.6-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assigning Boundary Conditions (cont’d)
Assign Insulating Boundary condition (contAssign Insulating Boundary condition (contAssign Insulating Boundary condition (contAssign Insulating Boundary condition (cont’’’’d)d)d)d)
To assign boundary form selected faces:To assign boundary form selected faces:To assign boundary form selected faces:To assign boundary form selected faces:
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Boundaries > Assign > InsulatingMaxwell 3D > Boundaries > Assign > InsulatingMaxwell 3D > Boundaries > Assign > InsulatingMaxwell 3D > Boundaries > Assign > Insulating
2. Click OKOKOKOK
Create airbox
Select the menu item Draw > Region
Type 300300300300 into Padding Percentage box
Click OKOKOKOK button
Setup solution
To setup solution for analysis:To setup solution for analysis:To setup solution for analysis:To setup solution for analysis:
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupMaxwell 3D > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupMaxwell 3D > Analysis Setup > Add Solution SetupMaxwell 3D > Analysis Setup > Add Solution Setup
2. Accept all defaults, and click OKOKOKOK
Save Project
1. Select the menu item File > SaveFile > SaveFile > SaveFile > Save
2. Enter the name bias_magnetbias_magnetbias_magnetbias_magnet

Training Manual
6.6-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Run Analysis
To run project validation before simulation:To run project validation before simulation:To run project validation before simulation:To run project validation before simulation:
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Validation CheckMaxwell 3D > Validation CheckMaxwell 3D > Validation CheckMaxwell 3D > Validation Check
2. If all entries come back with a green checkmark, then the project is ready to
analyze.
To run project:To run project:To run project:To run project:
1. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Analyze AllMaxwell 3D > Analyze AllMaxwell 3D > Analyze AllMaxwell 3D > Analyze All

Training Manual
6.6-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Post-Process Field Data
To create a field overlay plot of the static bias field:To create a field overlay plot of the static bias field:To create a field overlay plot of the static bias field:To create a field overlay plot of the static bias field:
1. From the Model history tree, expand the section marked Planes,Planes,Planes,Planes, and select
the plane marked Global:YZGlobal:YZGlobal:YZGlobal:YZ
2. Select the menu item Maxwell 3D > Fields > Fields > H > Mag HMaxwell 3D > Fields > Fields > H > Mag HMaxwell 3D > Fields > Fields > H > Mag HMaxwell 3D > Fields > Fields > H > Mag H
3. Accept the defaults for the field overlay plot.
4. By zooming into the ferrite object, we can see the magnitude of the static H
field is around 7000 A/m.

Training Manual
6.6-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Copy ferrite to clipboard
To copy an object to the clipboardTo copy an object to the clipboardTo copy an object to the clipboardTo copy an object to the clipboard
1. We want to use the ferrite object in its exact location in the HFSS project.
To accomplish this, we simply copy the object to the clipboard.
2. Select the menu item Edit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > Object
4. Select the object ferriteferriteferriteferrite
5. Click OKOKOKOK
6. Select the menu item Edit > CopyEdit > CopyEdit > CopyEdit > Copy
Getting Started

Training Manual
6.6-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
6.6-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
Paste the ferrite object from clipboardPaste the ferrite object from clipboardPaste the ferrite object from clipboardPaste the ferrite object from clipboard
To paste the ferrite object:To paste the ferrite object:To paste the ferrite object:To paste the ferrite object:
1. Select the menu item Edit > PasteEdit > PasteEdit > PasteEdit > Paste
Change the ferrite material propertiesChange the ferrite material propertiesChange the ferrite material propertiesChange the ferrite material properties
To edit the ferrite material propertiesTo edit the ferrite material propertiesTo edit the ferrite material propertiesTo edit the ferrite material properties
1. The ferrite material as imported from Maxwell 3D is not a valid definition for
an HFSS solution.
2. From the Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager, expand the section marked DefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitions
3. Expand the section marked MaterialsMaterialsMaterialsMaterials
4. Double-click on the material TT1TT1TT1TT1----109109109109
5. From the material properties dialog, change the values to those shown
below
Permittivity: 11.811.811.811.8
Permeability:
Type: SimpleSimpleSimpleSimple
Value: 1111
Magnetic Saturation: 1300 Gauss1300 Gauss1300 Gauss1300 Gauss
Lande G Factor: 1.981.981.981.98
DH: 162 Oe162 Oe162 Oe162 Oe

Training Manual
6.6-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials picklist in the toolbar, choose vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum
Create Top ArmCreate Top ArmCreate Top ArmCreate Top Arm
X: 0.450.450.450.45 Y: ----0.20.20.20.2, Z: 2222 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
dX: ----0.90.90.90.9, dY: 0.40.40.40.4, dZ: ----2,2,2,2, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ArmArmArmArm

Training Manual
6.6-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Graphically select (click on) the top face of the arm at Z=2in
1. Name: p1p1p1p1
Top face

Training Manual
6.6-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Object SelectionSet Object SelectionSet Object SelectionSet Object Selection
Create Arm 2 & 3Create Arm 2 & 3Create Arm 2 & 3Create Arm 2 & 3
To select the object Arm:To select the object Arm:To select the object Arm:To select the object Arm:
1. Select the objects named: ArmArmArmArm
To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:To create arm 3 & 4:
1. Axis: YYYY
2. Angle: 120120120120
5. Click the OKOKOKOK button to exit property window

Training Manual
6.6-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group the ArmsGroup the ArmsGroup the ArmsGroup the Arms
To group the arms:To group the arms:To group the arms:To group the arms:
2. In the field below the object list, you can enter a search term. Enter Arm*Arm*Arm*Arm*
and press EnterEnterEnterEnter
3. Click OKOKOKOK
Assigning the Excitations
Select the Ferrite objectSelect the Ferrite objectSelect the Ferrite objectSelect the Ferrite object
3. Select the object ferriteferriteferriteferrite
4. Click OKOKOKOK
Assign the Magnetic bias to the ferrite objectAssign the Magnetic bias to the ferrite objectAssign the Magnetic bias to the ferrite objectAssign the Magnetic bias to the ferrite object
To assign the magnetic bias:To assign the magnetic bias:To assign the magnetic bias:To assign the magnetic bias:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Magnetic BiasHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Magnetic BiasHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Magnetic BiasHFSS > Excitations > Assign > Magnetic Bias
2. In the excitation setup, select the Non-Uniform radio button
3. Click the Setup LinkSetup LinkSetup LinkSetup Link button
4.4.4.4. GeneralGeneralGeneralGeneral Tab
1. Save Source path relative to: This ProjectThis ProjectThis ProjectThis Project
2. Click on button to browse to location of saved Maxwell
project
5.5.5.5. ParametersParametersParametersParameters Tab
1. In the field that is populated under the heading ValueValueValueValue, enter the
variable name bias_currentbias_currentbias_currentbias_current., and press EnterEnterEnterEnter
2. Enter a value of 200A for this variable, and click OKOKOKOK.
3. Even though the Parameter shows bias_currentbias_currentbias_currentbias_current, we need to create
an HFSS-specific variable that can change the value in the Maxwell
project.
6. Click OKOKOKOK
7. Click FinishFinishFinishFinish

Training Manual
6.6-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.
Note:Note:Note:Note: Select the menu item, View > Active View VisibilityView > Active View VisibilityView > Active View VisibilityView > Active View Visibility to hide all
of the geometry objects. This makes it easier to see the boundary
conditions.

Training Manual
6.6-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Start: 8GHz8GHz8GHz8GHz
Stop: 12GHz: 12GHz: 12GHz: 12GHz
Count: 401: 401: 401: 401

Training Manual
6.6-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: ferrite_circulatorferrite_circulatorferrite_circulatorferrite_circulator
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
6.6-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view a real-time update of the Matrix Data during
analysis, open this dialog and set the Simulation to Setup1,Setup1,Setup1,Setup1,
Last AdaptiveLast AdaptiveLast AdaptiveLast Adaptive

Training Manual
6.6-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal S----Parameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive PassParameter Plot vs. Adaptive Pass
1. Solution: Setup1:Setup1:Setup1:Setup1: AdaptivePassAdaptivePassAdaptivePassAdaptivePass
3. Quantity: S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3)S(p1,p1), S(p1,p2), S(p1,p3) (Note: Hold down the
Ctrl key to select multiple Quantities)

Training Manual
6.6-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal SCreate Modal S----Parameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. FreqParameter Plot vs. Freq
2.2.2.2. Domain: SweepDomain: SweepDomain: SweepDomain: Sweep
3. Quantity: S(p1,p1), S(p2,p1), S(p3,p1),S(p1,p1), S(p2,p1), S(p3,p1),S(p1,p1), S(p2,p1), S(p3,p1),S(p1,p1), S(p2,p1), S(p3,p1), (Hold down the Ctrl
key to select multiple Quantities)
3. NOTE: The S21 of the circulator represents the insertion loss of the
through port, while the S31 represents the isolation characteristics.

Training Manual
6.6-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Select the menu item Window >Window >Window >Window > ferrite_circulatorferrite_circulatorferrite_circulatorferrite_circulator –––– HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1 ---- ModelerModelerModelerModeler
To select an object:To select an object:To select an object:To select an object:
1. Select the objects named: Arm, ferriteArm, ferriteArm, ferriteArm, ferrite
3. Select the menu Edit > PropertiesEdit > PropertiesEdit > PropertiesEdit > Properties
1. Select Attribute Tab
2. Click on the Transparency button
3. Set Transparency to aprox .75
4. Press OKOKOKOK button
4. Press CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl----AAAA to ensure waveguide is selected.
3. In Volume: AllObjectsAllObjectsAllObjectsAllObjects
2. In the Swept VariableSwept VariableSwept VariableSwept Variable tab, accept the defaults settings:
4. Steps: 9999
3. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
7.1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Bandpass Filter
Bandpass Filter
bandpass filter using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Cylinders, BoxesCylinders, BoxesCylinders, BoxesCylinders, Boxes
Boolean Operations: Duplicate Around AxisDuplicate Around AxisDuplicate Around AxisDuplicate Around Axis
Boundary/Excitation
Analysis
Sweep: Fast FrequencyFast FrequencyFast FrequencyFast Frequency
Results
Fields Overlays
2D & 3D Field Plots2D & 3D Field Plots2D & 3D Field Plots2D & 3D Field Plots
FFFFcentercentercentercenter = 1.50 GHz= 1.50 GHz= 1.50 GHz= 1.50 GHz
BW = 1 GHzBW = 1 GHzBW = 1 GHzBW = 1 GHz

Training Manual
7.1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Click the DisplayDisplayDisplayDisplay tab
Default Transparency: “0.4”
Operation Data Entry Mode:: “Dialog"
3. Select the menu item Tools > Options > Field Reporter OptionsTools > Options > Field Reporter OptionsTools > Options > Field Reporter OptionsTools > Options > Field Reporter Options.
1. Group Field Overlays by Type:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
7.1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
In an Ansoft HFSS window, click On the Standard toolbar, or select the menu
item File > NewFile > NewFile > NewFile > New.
From the ProjectProjectProjectProject menu, select Insert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS DesignInsert HFSS Design....
Select the menu item HFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution TypeHFSS > Solution Type
Solution Type Window:
Choose Driven ModalDriven ModalDriven ModalDriven Modal
Select the menu item Modeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > UnitsModeler > Units
Select Units: inininin

Training Manual
7.1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create cavityCreate cavityCreate cavityCreate cavity
In CreateBox dialog box edit the Command and Attribute tabs as shown below.
Click the OK button
1. Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View.... Or press CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D

Training Manual
7.1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create coax outer diameterCreate coax outer diameterCreate coax outer diameterCreate coax outer diameter
Select the menu item Draw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > Cylinder
In CreateCylinder dialog edit the Command and Attribute tabs as shown below.
Fit the View with CTRLCTRLCTRLCTRL----DDDD

Training Manual
7.1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Define new default materialDefine new default materialDefine new default materialDefine new default material
Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose Select
Select Definition Window:
Type pecpecpecpec in the Search by Name field

Training Manual
7.1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create coax inner diameterCreate coax inner diameterCreate coax inner diameterCreate coax inner diameter
Select the menu item Draw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > CylinderDraw > Cylinder
In CreateCylinder dialog edit the Command and Attribute tabs as
shown below.

Training Manual
7.1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create the coax feed probe with copy/pasteCreate the coax feed probe with copy/pasteCreate the coax feed probe with copy/pasteCreate the coax feed probe with copy/paste
Select the object feedin1 from the model tree.
Type CTRLCTRLCTRLCTRL----C/CTRLC/CTRLC/CTRLC/CTRL----VVVV to create a copy.
In the model tree, double click on the resulting object feedin2.
In the Attribute tab change the name to feedprobe1.
In the model tree expand the feedprobe1 branch.
Double click on the command CreateCylinder
In the Command tab change the Height to “-0.15”.

Training Manual
7.1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create first resonatorCreate first resonatorCreate first resonatorCreate first resonator
In CreateBox dialog edit the Command and Attribute tabs as shown
below.

Training Manual
7.1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create second resonatorCreate second resonatorCreate second resonatorCreate second resonator
below.

Training Manual
7.1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create third resonatorCreate third resonatorCreate third resonatorCreate third resonator
below.

Training Manual
7.1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create fourth resonatorCreate fourth resonatorCreate fourth resonatorCreate fourth resonator
below.

Training Manual
7.1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Graphically select the end face of the coax line at X=1.75in
To assign the wave port excitation:To assign the wave port excitation:To assign the wave port excitation:To assign the wave port excitation:
2. Wave Port: General
Name: p1p1p1p1
3. Wave Port: Modes
Accept the default settings for modes.
4. Wave Port: Post Processing
Accept the default settings for post processing
Note the addition of the port definition to the project tree

Training Manual
7.1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create remainder of model withCreate remainder of model withCreate remainder of model withCreate remainder of model with ““““DuplicateAroundAxisDuplicateAroundAxisDuplicateAroundAxisDuplicateAroundAxis””””
Return Selection mode toReturn Selection mode toReturn Selection mode toReturn Selection mode to ““““ObjectObjectObjectObject””””
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > ObjectEdit > Select > Object
To select objects to be duplicated:To select objects to be duplicated:To select objects to be duplicated:To select objects to be duplicated:
1. Select the objects named: feed1, feedpin1, feedprobe1, l1, l2, l3, l4feed1, feedpin1, feedprobe1, l1, l2, l3, l4feed1, feedpin1, feedprobe1, l1, l2, l3, l4feed1, feedpin1, feedprobe1, l1, l2, l3, l4
Note:Note:Note:Note: Use the Ctrl + Left mouse button to select multiple
objects
To create rest of model:To create rest of model:To create rest of model:To create rest of model:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around AxisEdit > Duplicate > Around Axis
Axis: ZZZZ
Angle: 180180180180
Total Number: 2222
Click OKOKOKOK when the Properties window appears
Fit the view with CTRL-D
Note the addition of the “p2” port definition to the project tree.

Training Manual
7.1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.
Note:Note:Note:Note: You may need to expand the window size to see all the
boundaries listed below.

Training Manual
7.1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Setup an HFSS Driven Modal Analysis
Creating a Solution SetupCreating a Solution SetupCreating a Solution SetupCreating a Solution Setup
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analysis Setup >HFSS > Analysis Setup >HFSS > Analysis Setup >HFSS > Analysis Setup >
Add Solution SetupAdd Solution SetupAdd Solution SetupAdd Solution Setup…………
1. In the project tree right-click on “setup1” under
the Analysis branch
1. Select “Add Frequency Sweep”
1. Sweep Type Pulldown: Fast: Fast: Fast: Fast
Count: 513: 513: 513: 513

Training Manual
7.1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: Filter_bpfFilter_bpfFilter_bpfFilter_bpf
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
7.1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution DataHFSS > Results > Solution Data…………
Note:Note:Note:Note: The default view is for convergence is TableTableTableTable. Select the PlotPlotPlotPlot
radio button to view a graphical representations of the convergence
data. See below.

Training Manual
7.1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create SCreate SCreate SCreate S----parameter vs. Frequencyparameter vs. Frequencyparameter vs. Frequencyparameter vs. Frequency
2. Edit Report Window::::
1. Solution: Setup1 : Sweep1
2. Domain: Sweep
3. Category: S-parameters
4. Quantity: S(p1,p1) and S(p2,p1)
Note:Note:Note:Note: Use CtrlCtrlCtrlCtrl key for multiple selection
5. Function: dB
6. Click New ReportNew ReportNew ReportNew Report
7. Click CloseCloseCloseClose

Training Manual
7.1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
Freq [GHz]
-70.00
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y1
Curve Info
dB(S(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(S(p2,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Note new plot “XY Plot 1” in project
tree

Training Manual
7.1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Add a Separate YAdd a Separate YAdd a Separate YAdd a Separate Y----axis and Change Plot Scaleaxis and Change Plot Scaleaxis and Change Plot Scaleaxis and Change Plot Scale
In the Project tree left-click once on the branch HFSSDesign1 > Results > XYHFSSDesign1 > Results > XYHFSSDesign1 > Results > XYHFSSDesign1 > Results > XY
Plot 1 > dB(S(p2,p1))Plot 1 > dB(S(p2,p1))Plot 1 > dB(S(p2,p1))Plot 1 > dB(S(p2,p1)).
In the Properties window in the Y-axis row click on Y1 and change to Y2
Double left click on a number of the resulting Y2 axis to the right side of XY Plot 1
Edit the Scaling tab as shown
Press OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
7.1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Rename PlotRename PlotRename PlotRename Plot
In the Project tree right-click on the branch HFSSDesign1 > Results > XY Plot 1HFSSDesign1 > Results > XY Plot 1HFSSDesign1 > Results > XY Plot 1HFSSDesign1 > Results > XY Plot 1
Select Rename
Change name to S-params
<return>
0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 2.20 2.40
Freq [GHz]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
dB(S(p1,p1))
-1.00
-0.90
-0.80
-0.70
-0.60
-0.50
-0.40
-0.30
-0.20
-0.10
0.00
dB(S(p2,p1))
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1S-params
Curve Info
dB(S(p1,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(S(p2,p1))
Setup1 : Sweep1

Training Manual
7.1-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field OverlaysField OverlaysField OverlaysField Overlays
Select the Menu item Window>Window>Window>Window> filter_bpffilter_bpffilter_bpffilter_bpf ---- HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1 ---- ModelerModelerModelerModeler
In the Model tree select the branch Planes >Planes >Planes >Planes > Global:XYGlobal:XYGlobal:XYGlobal:XY
Move the mouse pointer into the model window
Right-click and select Plot Fields > E >Plot Fields > E >Plot Fields > E >Plot Fields > E > Mag_EMag_EMag_EMag_E
Click DoneDoneDoneDone

Training Manual
7.1-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Rescale and Animate Field OverlayRescale and Animate Field OverlayRescale and Animate Field OverlayRescale and Animate Field Overlay
In the model window right-click on the color scale and select Modify
Edit the Scale tab as shown
Press CloseCloseCloseClose
In the project tree right-click in the branch HFSSDesign1 > FieldHFSSDesign1 > FieldHFSSDesign1 > FieldHFSSDesign1 > Field
Overlays > EOverlays > EOverlays > EOverlays > E----field > Mag_E1field > Mag_E1field > Mag_E1field > Mag_E1 and select Animate
Click the OKOKOKOK button.

Training Manual
8.1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – LVDS Differential Pair
LVDS Differential Pair
This differential pair example is intended to show you how to create, simulate,
and analyze a differential pair using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) technology is used for high-
performance backplanes. The LVDS technology is used for multi-point
communications and uses a bus similar to the system shown below. The
following illustrations detail the passive device you will be creating.
LAYER 1 (TOP SIDE)
LAYER 2 (SIGNAL 1)
LAYER 3 (BOTTOM SIDE)
26mil
Traces:Traces:Traces:Traces:
Width= 6milWidth= 6milWidth= 6milWidth= 6mil
Spacing= 18milSpacing= 18milSpacing= 18milSpacing= 18mil
Thickness=0.7milThickness=0.7milThickness=0.7milThickness=0.7mil
Length: 1000milLength: 1000milLength: 1000milLength: 1000mil
Substrate:Substrate:Substrate:Substrate:
Thickness=26milThickness=26milThickness=26milThickness=26mil
εεεεrrrr= 4.4= 4.4= 4.4= 4.4

Training Manual
8.1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
create this passive device model.
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Box, RectanglesBox, RectanglesBox, RectanglesBox, Rectangles
Boolean Operations: Duplicate Along Line, Sweep Along VectorDuplicate Along Line, Sweep Along VectorDuplicate Along Line, Sweep Along VectorDuplicate Along Line, Sweep Along Vector
Analysis
Sweep: InterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolatingInterpolating
Results
Cartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plotting
Field Overlays
3D Field Plots3D Field Plots3D Field Plots3D Field Plots

Training Manual
8.1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Before we jump into setting up this device lets review the design.
Trace Width = 6mils
Trace Length= 1000mils
Dielectric Height= 13mils x 2
1/2oz copper Traces/Grounds= 0.7mils
Port Size= ???
Port Width
The port width should be at least 3-5 times the stackup(78-130mils). Since
the traces are not centered, lets use 5x and add the pair spacing(18mils)
for a total port/model width of 220mils.
Trace Length
Since we are modeling a uniform transmission line, we do not need to
simulate the 1000mils length. Lets reduce the model to 100 mils and use
de-embedding to add the extra length.
Material Properties
To start with, lets make an engineering assumption that the material
properties are constant over frequency. In addition, we will assume that
modeling the traces as perfect conductors will not have an impact on the
performance of the device. This will speed up the simulation. As an
additional exercise, the model can be modified to include frequency
dependent materials and lossy conductors.
Ground Planes
Since we are ignoring the metal conductivity, we do not need to create
objects for the ground planes. Instead, we will utilize the background
(Perfect Conductor) boundary. If we need to investigate the effects of
copper, a finite conductivity boundary condition can be used to simulate the
copper ground planes.

Training Manual
8.1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Solution Setup
Since we are going to use the model for SPICE simulation, the frequency range
of interest is going to be determined by the rise-time(tr) of the input signal. The
maximum frequency is calculated by taking 0.5/tr, or the knee frequency, and
multiplying it by the number of samples per tr. The minimum frequency should
be selected as close to DC as possible.
The following values will be used for the Solution Setup
Rise-Time(tr): 330ps
Number of Samples: 5
Upper Frequency: (0.5/330ps)*5 ~ 7.58GHz or 8.0GHz
Lower Frequency: 0.01GHz
Frequency Spacing: 0.01GHz
Single(Adaptive) Frequency: 8.0GHz
Adaptive Passes: 10
Delta S: 0.02
Sweep Type: Interpolating

Training Manual
8.1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
Auto-assign terminals on ports::::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: milmilmilmil

Training Manual
8.1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Trace 1Create Trace 1Create Trace 1Create Trace 1
To create trace 1:To create trace 1:To create trace 1:To create trace 1:
1.Select the menu item Draw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > BoxDraw > Box
rectangle:
2. For PositionPositionPositionPosition, type: 0.0mil, S/2,0.0mil, S/2,0.0mil, S/2,0.0mil, S/2, ----0.35mil0.35mil0.35mil0.35mil, Click the TabTabTabTab key to accept
Add Variable SSSS: 18mil18mil18mil18mil, Click the OKOKOKOK button
3. For YSizeYSizeYSizeYSize, type: WWWW, Click the TabTabTabTab key to accept
Add Variable WWWW: 6mil6mil6mil6mil, Click the OKOKOKOK button
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: trace1trace1trace1trace1
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View....

Training Manual
8.1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Trace 2Create Trace 2Create Trace 2Create Trace 2
To create trace 2:To create trace 2:To create trace 2:To create trace 2:
2. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > MirrorEdit > Duplicate > MirrorEdit > Duplicate > MirrorEdit > Duplicate > Mirror.
1. Input the anchor point of the mirror plane:
2. Input the target point of the vector normal to the mirror plane:
3. Click OKOKOKOK when the Property WindowProperty WindowProperty WindowProperty Window appears
1. Select the menu item HFSS > ListHFSS > ListHFSS > ListHFSS > List
2. From the ModelModelModelModel tab, select the object named trace1_1trace1_1trace1_1trace1_1
3. Click the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties button
1. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: trace2trace2trace2trace2

Training Manual
8.1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Material Name: My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4

Training Manual
8.1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create substrate:To create substrate:To create substrate:To create substrate:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: ----100.0100.0100.0100.0, Z: ----13.0,13.0,13.0,13.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: substratesubstratesubstratesubstrate
To set the transparency:To set the transparency:To set the transparency:To set the transparency:
2. Click the button for Transparency
1. Move the slide bar to 0.80.80.80.8 (Opaque=0, Transparency=1)

Training Manual
8.1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Wave Port ExcitationCreate Wave Port ExcitationCreate Wave Port ExcitationCreate Wave Port Excitation
Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZModeler > Grid Plane > YZ
To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:To create a rectangle that represents the port:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: ----100.0100.0100.0100.0, Z: ----13.013.013.013.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
NoteNoteNoteNote: You can also select the object from the
Model Tree
To duplicate the object Port1:To duplicate the object Port1:To duplicate the object Port1:To duplicate the object Port1:
1. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along Line
2. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the first point of the duplicate vector
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the second point of the duplicate
vector
4. Duplicate Along Line Windows
3. Click OKOKOKOK when the Property WindowProperty WindowProperty WindowProperty Window appears
5. From the Model tree select the object Port1_1Port1_1Port1_1Port1_1.
6. In the Property window for the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Port2Port2Port2Port2

Training Manual
8.1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)
Select the object Port1.Port1.Port1.Port1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign >HFSS > Excitations > Assign >HFSS > Excitations > Assign >HFSS > Excitations > Assign >
Wave Port,Wave Port,Wave Port,Wave Port, a window appears and click OKOKOKOK. The wave port and terminals are
automatically assigned.
Note:Note:Note:Note: Reference Conductors are not shown
because we are using the Outer
boundary condition as the Reference Conductor
Set the name for excitations:Set the name for excitations:Set the name for excitations:Set the name for excitations:
• Expand the ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations in
Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager
• Click on WavePort1.WavePort1.WavePort1.WavePort1.
• Change the namenamenamename in the
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: P1P1P1P1
Set Differential pairsSet Differential pairsSet Differential pairsSet Differential pairs
• Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Differential pairsHFSS > Excitations > Differential pairsHFSS > Excitations > Differential pairsHFSS > Excitations > Differential pairs
• Click the New PairNew PairNew PairNew Pair button
• Click OKOKOKOK
Repeat the above stepsRepeat the above stepsRepeat the above stepsRepeat the above steps to assign an excitation for the object Port2Port2Port2Port2
and set the excitation name as P2.P2.P2.P2. Then add a new diff pair.

Training Manual
8.1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)Create Wave Port Excitation (Continued)
To set deembedding:To set deembedding:To set deembedding:To set deembedding:
1. From the Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager, select the excitation named P2P2P2P2
2. In the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window:
1. Deembed Distance: ----900mil900mil900mil900mil (Positive Values are into the Port)
2. Deembed: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.
3. Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button when you are finished.

Training Manual
8.1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Do Lambda Refinement: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Lambda Target: Use Default Value: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Order of basis function: Zero order.: Zero order.: Zero order.: Zero order.
2. Frequency Setup:
Type: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step: Linear Step
Step: 0.01GHz: 0.01GHz: 0.01GHz: 0.01GHz
3. Interpolating Sweep Options:
Max Solutions: 50: 50: 50: 50
Error Tolerance: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%
4. Extrapolate to DC:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Minimum Solve Frequency: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz

Training Manual
8.1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpair
Analyze
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view any errors or warning messages, see the Message
Manager.
1. Select the menu item HFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > AnalyzeHFSS > Analyze Or click the icon
on the tool bar.

Training Manual
8.1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00
Freq [GHz]
-100.00
-80.00
-60.00
-40.00
-20.00
0.00
Y1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSModel1XY Plot 1
Curve Info
dB(St(Diff1,Diff1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(St(Diff1,Comm1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
dB(St(Diff1,p2_Diff1))
Setup1 : Sweep1
Create Reports
Create Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
1. Category: Terminal S ParametersTerminal S ParametersTerminal S ParametersTerminal S Parameters
2. Quantity: St(Diff1,Diff1), St(Diff1,Comm1), St(Diff1, Diff2St(Diff1,Diff1), St(Diff1,Comm1), St(Diff1, Diff2St(Diff1,Diff1), St(Diff1,Comm1), St(Diff1, Diff2St(Diff1,Diff1), St(Diff1,Comm1), St(Diff1, Diff2)

Training Manual
8.1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Differential and Common Pair Impedances Data TableCreate Differential and Common Pair Impedances Data TableCreate Differential and Common Pair Impedances Data TableCreate Differential and Common Pair Impedances Data Table
Report > Data TableReport > Data TableReport > Data TableReport > Data Table
2. Context Window: Solution: Setup1:Setup1:Setup1:Setup1: LastAdaptiveLastAdaptiveLastAdaptiveLastAdaptive
3. Trace Window
1. Category: Terminal PortTerminal PortTerminal PortTerminal Port ZoZoZoZo
2. Quantity: Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)
Matrix DataMatrix DataMatrix DataMatrix Data ---- Export SExport SExport SExport S----parameters to a fileparameters to a fileparameters to a fileparameters to a file
1.Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Solution Data,HFSS > Results > Solution Data,HFSS > Results > Solution Data,HFSS > Results > Solution Data,
2.Solution Data dialog
1.Click the Matrix DataMatrix DataMatrix DataMatrix Data Tab
2.Simulation: Setup1, Sweep1Setup1, Sweep1Setup1, Sweep1Setup1, Sweep1
3.Click the ExportExportExportExport button.
1.Filename: hfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpairhfss_lvds_diffpair
2.Save as Type: TouchstoneTouchstoneTouchstoneTouchstone
3.Click the SaveSaveSaveSave button
4.Click the OKOKOKOK button to accept 50 ohm
reference impedance
4.Click the CloseCloseCloseClose button

Training Manual
8.1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
Set Sources: CommonSet Sources: CommonSet Sources: CommonSet Sources: Common
To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:
2. Edit Sources Window::::
1. For Trace1_T1: Use the default value
2. For Trace2_T1: Scaling Factor: 1111
3. For Trace1_T2: Terminated:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
4. For Trace2_T2: Terminated:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Select the menu item Window>Window>Window>Window> hfss_diff_pairhfss_diff_pairhfss_diff_pairhfss_diff_pair –––– HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1---- ModelerModelerModelerModeler
3. In Volume: AllObjectsAllObjectsAllObjectsAllObjects
To modify the attributes of a field plot:To modify the attributes of a field plot:To modify the attributes of a field plot:To modify the attributes of a field plot:
2. Select Plot Folder Window, Click the OKOKOKOK button
3. E-Field Window:
2. Min: 5555
3. Max: 10000100001000010000
2. Click the PlotPlotPlotPlot tab
1. IsoValType: FringeFringeFringeFringe
2. If real time modereal time modereal time modereal time mode is not checked, click the ApplyApplyApplyApply button.

Training Manual
8.1-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Field Overlay (Cont. )Create Field Overlay (Cont. )Create Field Overlay (Cont. )Create Field Overlay (Cont. )
3. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Vector_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Vector_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Vector_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Vector_E
1. Solution: Setup1 : LastAdaptiveSetup1 : LastAdaptiveSetup1 : LastAdaptiveSetup1 : LastAdaptive
2. Quantity: Vector_EVector_EVector_EVector_E
3. In Volume: AllAllAllAll
3. E-Field Window:
1. Click the Marker/ArrowMarker/ArrowMarker/ArrowMarker/Arrow tab
1. Type: CylinderCylinderCylinderCylinder
2. Map Size: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
3. Arrow Tale: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked

Training Manual
8.1-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Set Differential Mode Field ExcitationSet Differential Mode Field ExcitationSet Differential Mode Field ExcitationSet Differential Mode Field Excitation
To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:To set the field excitation:
2. Edit Sources Window::::
1. For Trace2_T1: Offset Phase: 180 Deg.
The field plots will automatically be updated to reflect the changes.

Training Manual
8.1-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
During the design of a device, it is common practice to develop design trends based on
swept parameters. Ansoft HFSS with Optimetrics Parametric Sweep can automatically
create these design curves.
We will parameterize this design using two variables:
1. Variable W will vary the width of traces: 6 ≤ W ≤ 12 mils
2. Variable S will vary the spacing between traces: 15 ≤ S ≤ 21 mils
In the post processor you will able to display results and see how Differential impedance
changes with the respect to trace width and spacing between traces.
6666 ≤≤≤≤ WWWW ≤≤≤≤ 12 mils12 mils12 mils12 mils
15151515 ≤≤≤≤ SSSS ≤≤≤≤ 21 mils21 mils21 mils21 mils
WWWW
SSSS

Training Manual
8.1-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Variable: SSSS
5. Count: 3333
6. Click the Add >>Add >>Add >>Add >> button
7. Variable: WWWW
11. Count: 3333
12. Click the AddAddAddAdd >>>>>>>> button
2. Click on the OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions tab::::
1. Save Fields And Mesh:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.1-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
8.1-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Terminal Port Zo vs SCreate Terminal Port Zo vs SCreate Terminal Port Zo vs SCreate Terminal Port Zo vs S
Report >Report >Report >Report > Rectangular PlotRectangular PlotRectangular PlotRectangular Plot
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
1. X: S
2. Category: Terminal Port ZoTerminal Port ZoTerminal Port ZoTerminal Port Zo
3. Quantity: Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)Zot(Diff1,Diff1), Zot(Comm1,Comm1)
4. Function: MagMagMagMag
15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00
S[mil]
0.00
20.00
40.00
60.00
80.00
100.00
120.00
Y1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1XYPlot 3
CurveInfo
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
Setup1: LastAdaptive
Freq='8GHz' W='6mil'
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
mag(Zot(Comm1,C
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1
mag(Zot(Diff1,Diff1

Training Manual
8.1-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
Create Field Plot vs SCreate Field Plot vs SCreate Field Plot vs SCreate Field Plot vs S
Using the project tree, expand the Field OverlayField OverlayField OverlayField Overlay, E FieldE FieldE FieldE Field.
Double Click on Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1 to make the field plot visible
Right-Click on Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1 and select AnimateAnimateAnimateAnimate
Setup Animation
Swept Variable: SSSS
The Animation dialog will appear.
Exiting HFSSExiting HFSSExiting HFSSExiting HFSS
To Exit HFSS:To Exit HFSS:To Exit HFSS:To Exit HFSS:
1. Select the menu item File > ExitFile > ExitFile > ExitFile > Exit
1. If prompted Save the changes

Training Manual
8.1-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Launching Ansoft Designer
To access Ansoft Designer, click the Microsoft StartStartStartStart button, select ProgramsProgramsProgramsPrograms, select
AnsoftAnsoftAnsoftAnsoft and select the Designer 4Designer 4Designer 4Designer 4 program group. Click Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4.
To create a new project:To create a new project:To create a new project:To create a new project:
From the ProjectProjectProjectProject menu, select Insert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit Design
Choose Layout Technology Window
Click NoneNoneNoneNone

Training Manual
8.1-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adding an HFSS Design – LVDS Diff Pair Model
To insert an HFSS Design select the menu item Project> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSS
Model..Model..Model..Model..
The HFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic Link window will appear
Change Name to: Diff_pairDiff_pairDiff_pairDiff_pair
File name: Click on the ............ browse button
The OpenOpenOpenOpen window will appear
Browse to the location of hfss_lvds_diffpair.hfsshfss_lvds_diffpair.hfsshfss_lvds_diffpair.hfsshfss_lvds_diffpair.hfss
Click OpenOpenOpenOpen
Click on the Link DescriptionLink DescriptionLink DescriptionLink Description tab
Transmission Line Model (Waveport1): CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Click OKOKOKOK to close the HFSS Dynamic Link window
Browse button

Training Manual
8.1-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Placing Components
Place the HFSS model in the schematic
1. Click the ProjectProjectProjectProject tab in the Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager
2.2.2.2. Expand DefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitions then expand ModelsModelsModelsModels
3. Select diff_pairdiff_pairdiff_pairdiff_pair, right click and select Place New ComponentPlace New ComponentPlace New ComponentPlace New Component…………
4. Click NoNoNoNo for Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?
5.5.5.5. Left mouse click to place on the schematic. To finish hit Esc key.
Edit the Diff Pair component
1. Right mouse click on the Diff Pair component in the schematic and select
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties
2. For the Value of HFSSLineLengthHFSSLineLengthHFSSLineLengthHFSSLineLength type 1000mil1000mil1000mil1000mil.
3. Press OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
8.1-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Component PlacementComponent PlacementComponent PlacementComponent Placement –––– continuedcontinuedcontinuedcontinued
Place 3 Resistors in the schematic
1. In the Components TabComponents TabComponents TabComponents Tab, under LumpedLumpedLumpedLumped ----> Resistors> Resistors> Resistors> Resistors, double click
ResistorsResistorsResistorsResistors
2. Click the left mouse button 3 times to place 3 resistors in the
schematic.
3. To end the placement, click the right mouse button and select
FinishFinishFinishFinish. (You can also end the placement by pressing the space bar)
Note:Note:Note:Note: Before placing a component on the schematic use the RRRR key to
rotate. If a component is already placed, use the <ctrl> R<ctrl> R<ctrl> R<ctrl> R key to rotate.
Change the value of the third resistor
1. Right mouse click the resistor shown on the right hand side of the
schematic and then select Properties in the pull down menu
2. Change the value of RRRR from 50 to 100100100100, then hit EnterEnterEnterEnter
Note: alternatively, you can double left mouse button click on the
resistor to bring up the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window (shown below) and
change the value from 100 to 50505050, then hit EnterEnterEnterEnter

Training Manual
8.1-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Place Piecewise Linear Source
1. In the Components Tab, under Independent SourcesIndependent SourcesIndependent SourcesIndependent Sources, double click
on VPWL Piecewise LinearVPWL Piecewise LinearVPWL Piecewise LinearVPWL Piecewise Linear Voltage SourceVoltage SourceVoltage SourceVoltage Source.
2. Left mouse click to place the source in the schematic
3. Press the space barspace barspace barspace bar to finish the placement
Edit Properties of Voltage Source
1. Right mouse click on the source PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties in the pull down menu
2. Change value of Time2Time2Time2Time2 to 330ps330ps330ps330ps
3. Change value of Val2Val2Val2Val2 to 1V1V1V1V

Training Manual
8.1-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Place Second Piecewise Linear Source
2. Change value of Time2Time2Time2Time2 to 330ps330ps330ps330ps
3. Change value of Val2Val2Val2Val2 to -1V1V1V1V

Training Manual
8.1-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect components
1. Select the menu item DrawDrawDrawDraw ----> Wire> Wire> Wire> Wire
2. Place the cursor (which is now an X) over a node and left mouse click once
3. Drag the mouse to the connection node and left mouse click once.
4. Repeat this procedure until the connections below are made
Adding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground Connections
1. Select the menu item Draw > GroundDraw > GroundDraw > GroundDraw > Ground (alternatively you can select the
toolbar icon)
2. Place 2 ground connections on the ends of the voltage sources as shown
below
Adding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage Probes
1. In the ComponentsComponentsComponentsComponents tab, expand the Probes.Probes.Probes.Probes.
2. Place 4 Voltage ProbesVoltage ProbesVoltage ProbesVoltage Probes and name them Vin1, Vin2, Vout1, Vout2 as shown
below.
3. Place a Differential Voltage ProbeDifferential Voltage ProbeDifferential Voltage ProbeDifferential Voltage Probe across the 100 Ohm resistor and name it
VdiffVdiffVdiffVdiff as shown below....

Training Manual
8.1-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item File > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save As.
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: lvds_diffpair_transientlvds_diffpair_transientlvds_diffpair_transientlvds_diffpair_transient
Analysis Setup
1. Select the menu item Nexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > Transient
2. Analysis Setup Window:
1.1.1.1. Analysis ControlAnalysis ControlAnalysis ControlAnalysis Control
1. Step: 1ps1ps1ps1ps
2. Stop: 2ns2ns2ns2ns
2. Click OKOKOKOK
3. Select the menu item Nexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > Analyze

Training Manual
8.1-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Plot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveforms
Create ReportCreate ReportCreate ReportCreate Report
1. Select the menu item Nexxim Circuit> Results > Create Standard Report>Nexxim Circuit> Results > Create Standard Report>Nexxim Circuit> Results > Create Standard Report>Nexxim Circuit> Results > Create Standard Report>
Rectangular PlotRectangular PlotRectangular PlotRectangular Plot
1. Category: VoltageVoltageVoltageVoltage
2. Quantity: V(Vin1), V(Vin2), V(Vout1), V(Vout2)V(Vin1), V(Vin2), V(Vout1), V(Vout2)V(Vin1), V(Vin2), V(Vout1), V(Vout2)V(Vin1), V(Vin2), V(Vout1), V(Vout2)
3. Function: <none><none><none><none>

Training Manual
8.2-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Segmented Return Path
Segmented Return Path
trace over a slot in the ground plant using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
LAYER 1 (SIGNAL 1)
LAYER 2 (BOTTOM SIDE)
1.3mm
Board:Board:Board:Board:
Thickness= 1.3mmThickness= 1.3mmThickness= 1.3mmThickness= 1.3mm
εεεεrrrr= 4.5= 4.5= 4.5= 4.5
Trace:Trace:Trace:Trace:
Length= 8.2cmLength= 8.2cmLength= 8.2cmLength= 8.2cm
Termination: 47Termination: 47Termination: 47Termination: 47ΩΩΩΩ
8 mm
4 cm
5 cm 6 mm 3.4 cm 1 cm
1 cm
3mm
6 cm

Training Manual
8.2-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Box, RectanglesBox, RectanglesBox, RectanglesBox, Rectangles
Boolean Operations: SubtractSubtractSubtractSubtract
Ports: Lumped PortLumped PortLumped PortLumped Port
Boundary Conditions: Lumped RLC, PMLLumped RLC, PMLLumped RLC, PMLLumped RLC, PML
Analysis
Sweep: Interpolating SweepInterpolating SweepInterpolating SweepInterpolating Sweep
Results
Cartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plottingCartesian and Smith Chart plotting
Field Overlays
Magnitude and Vector Field PlottingMagnitude and Vector Field PlottingMagnitude and Vector Field PlottingMagnitude and Vector Field Plotting
AnimationAnimationAnimationAnimation

Training Manual
8.2-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Trace Width = 3mm
Trace Length= 8.2cm
Dielectric Height= 1.3mm
Port Size/Type= ???
Free Space= PML or Radiation Boundary
Port Size/Type
Since the trace is internal to the model, let’s use a lumped gap source port
Trace Thickness/Material Properties
To start let’s make an engineering assumption that the trace thickness and
conductivity will not have an impact on the performance of the device. This
will speed up the simulation.
Free Space
We should expect some radiation to occur because of the slot in the ground,
however, it should not be very strong. Because there is limited radiation the
separation from the device and the free-space boundary can be kept to a
minimum. The incidence angle of the radiation is unknown, therefore we
should use a PML. The maximum spacing will be ~λ/20 @ 1GHz or about
1.5cm

Training Manual
8.2-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started
Auto-assign terminals on ports: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.2-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.2-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4

Training Manual
8.2-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create BoardCreate BoardCreate BoardCreate Board
To create the board:To create the board:To create the board:To create the board:
rectangle:
dX: 6.06.06.06.0, dY: 10.010.010.010.0, dZ: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: BoardBoardBoardBoard
Select the menu item View > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active ViewView > Fit All > Active View.... Or press the CTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+DCTRL+D key
To create ground:To create ground:To create ground:To create ground:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:

Training Manual
8.2-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 5.05.05.05.0, Z: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
Create Ground Cut OutCreate Ground Cut OutCreate Ground Cut OutCreate Ground Cut Out
To create cut out:To create cut out:To create cut out:To create cut out:
rectangle:
dX: 4.04.04.04.0, dY: 6.0mm6.0mm6.0mm6.0mm, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
4. Press OKOKOKOK when the Properties window appears
Select Ground & Rectangle1:Select Ground & Rectangle1:Select Ground & Rectangle1:Select Ground & Rectangle1:
1. Select the objects named: Ground, Rectangle1Ground, Rectangle1Ground, Rectangle1Ground, Rectangle1
To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:
2. Subtract Window
Tool Parts: Rectangle1Rectangle1Rectangle1Rectangle1

Training Manual
8.2-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To select the ground:To select the ground:To select the ground:To select the ground:
X: 1.01.01.01.0, Y: 8.0mm8.0mm8.0mm8.0mm, Z: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key

Training Manual
8.2-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To create trace:To create trace:To create trace:To create trace:
rectangle:
dX: 3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm, dY: 8.28.28.28.2, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
1. Select the objects named: TraceTraceTraceTrace
1. Name: PerfE_TracePerfE_TracePerfE_TracePerfE_Trace

Training Manual
8.2-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZ
rectangle:
dX: 3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key

Training Manual
8.2-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Conducting Object: TraceTraceTraceTrace
3. Reference Conductors: GroundGroundGroundGround
4. Click OKOKOKOK
1. Expand the ExcitationsExcitationsExcitationsExcitations in Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager
2. Click on LumpPort1.LumpPort1.LumpPort1.LumpPort1.
3. Change the NameNameNameName in the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: p1p1p1p1

Training Manual
8.2-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create ResistorCreate ResistorCreate ResistorCreate Resistor
rectangle:
dX: 3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm3.0mm, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ResistorResistorResistorResistor

Training Manual
8.2-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign Lumped RLCAssign Lumped RLCAssign Lumped RLCAssign Lumped RLC
To select the object Resistor:To select the object Resistor:To select the object Resistor:To select the object Resistor:
1.Select the menu item Edit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By NameEdit > Select > By Name
2.Select Object Dialog,
1.Select the objects named: ResistorResistorResistorResistor
2.Click the OKOKOKOK button
To assign lumped RLC boundaryTo assign lumped RLC boundaryTo assign lumped RLC boundaryTo assign lumped RLC boundary
1.Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Lumped RLCHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Lumped RLCHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Lumped RLCHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Lumped RLC
2.Lumped RLC Boundary
1.Name: RRRR
2.Resistance: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
3.Resistance: 47 Ohm47 Ohm47 Ohm47 Ohm
4.For Current Flow LineCurrent Flow LineCurrent Flow LineCurrent Flow Line, click UndefinedUndefinedUndefinedUndefined and select New LineNew LineNew LineNew Line
5.Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vector position
X: 1.5mm1.5mm1.5mm1.5mm, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: ----1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
6.Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the vertex
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm1.3mm, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
7.Click the OKOKOKOK button

Training Manual
8.2-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To set the default material as AirTo set the default material as AirTo set the default material as AirTo set the default material as Air
rectangle:

Training Manual
8.2-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign a Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)Assign a Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)Assign a Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)Assign a Perfectly Matched Layer (PML)
To select the air:To select the air:To select the air:To select the air:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select by nameEdit > Select by nameEdit > Select by nameEdit > Select by name
2. Object Name: AirAirAirAir
To assign the PML boundaryTo assign the PML boundaryTo assign the PML boundaryTo assign the PML boundary
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries > PML Setup WizardHFSS > Boundaries > PML Setup WizardHFSS > Boundaries > PML Setup WizardHFSS > Boundaries > PML Setup Wizard
2. PML Setup Wizard: Cover Objects
1. Select: Create PML Cover Objects on Selected FacesCreate PML Cover Objects on Selected FacesCreate PML Cover Objects on Selected FacesCreate PML Cover Objects on Selected Faces
2. Uniform Layer Thickness: 1cm1cm1cm1cm
3. Create joining corner and edge objects: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
3. PML Setup Wizard: Material Parameters
1. Select: PMLPMLPMLPML Objects acceptObjects acceptObjects acceptObjects accept Free RadiationFree RadiationFree RadiationFree Radiation
1. Min Frequency: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz
2. Minimum Radiating Distance: 56.33mm: 56.33mm: 56.33mm: 56.33mm
2. Review settings on the PML Setup Wizard: Summary page.

Training Manual
8.2-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create a Face ListCreate a Face ListCreate a Face ListCreate a Face List
Since we are using the PML, we need to create a face list that will be used for the
radiation calculation.
To create a face listTo create a face listTo create a face listTo create a face list
2. FaceID: <Select All>: <Select All>: <Select All>: <Select All>
4. Select the menu item Modeler > List > Create > Face ListModeler > List > Create > Face ListModeler > List > Create > Face ListModeler > List > Create > Face List
Infinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite SphereInfinite Sphere Tab
1. Name: RadiationRadiationRadiationRadiation

Training Manual
8.2-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
boundary.

Training Manual
8.2-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Lambda Target: Use Default Value CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Order of Basis function: FirstFirstFirstFirst----OrderOrderOrderOrder
2. Frequency Setup:
Error Tolerance: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%
4. Extrapolate to DC:::: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Minimum Solve Frequency: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz: 0.01 GHz

Training Manual
8.2-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_seg_gplanehfss_seg_gplanehfss_seg_gplanehfss_seg_gplane
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
8.2-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.2-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
2. Context Window:
1. Solution: Setup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePass
3. Trace Window
2. Quantity: St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)

Training Manual
8.2-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create ZCreate ZCreate ZCreate Z----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot –––– Real/ImaginaryReal/ImaginaryReal/ImaginaryReal/Imaginary
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
1. Category: TerminalTerminalTerminalTerminal Z ParameterZ ParameterZ ParameterZ Parameter
2. Quantity: Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)Zt(Trace_T1,Trace_T1)
3. Function: Re, ImRe, ImRe, ImRe, Im
4.4.4.4. To add an additional YTo add an additional YTo add an additional YTo add an additional Y----AxisAxisAxisAxis
for im(Z(p1,p1))for im(Z(p1,p1))for im(Z(p1,p1))for im(Z(p1,p1))
1. Click Im(Z) in Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager
2. In the Properties window:
Select Y1 in Y Axis column
and toggle it to Y2Y2Y2Y2

Training Manual
8.2-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal SCreate Terminal S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot –––– Smith ChartSmith ChartSmith ChartSmith Chart
Report >Report >Report >Report > Smith ChartSmith ChartSmith ChartSmith Chart
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
2. Quantity: St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)St(Trace_T1, Trace_T1)

Training Manual
8.2-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create 3D Polar Far Field PlotCreate 3D Polar Far Field PlotCreate 3D Polar Far Field PlotCreate 3D Polar Far Field Plot
To create a 3D Far Field PlotTo create a 3D Far Field PlotTo create a 3D Far Field PlotTo create a 3D Far Field Plot
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >3DHFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >3DHFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >3DHFSS > Results > Create Far Fields Report >3D
Polar PlotPolar PlotPolar PlotPolar Plot
2. Context Window:
2. Geometry: Radiation: Radiation: Radiation: Radiation
1. Category: rErErErE
2. Quantity: rETotalrETotalrETotalrETotal

Training Manual
8.2-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
1. Confirm you are in Object SelectObject SelectObject SelectObject Select mode by right-clicking in the geometry
window, and selecting from context menu if necessary.
1. Select the objects named: BoardBoardBoardBoard
4. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_E
To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:To modify a Magnitude field plot:
3. E-Field Window:
2. Min: 1111
3. Max: 4500450045004500
2. Click the PlotsPlotsPlotsPlots Tab
1. Scalar Plot: IsoValSurfaceIsoValSurfaceIsoValSurfaceIsoValSurface

Training Manual
8.2-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > Other >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > Other >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > Other >HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > Other >
Vector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoynting
2. Quantity: Vector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoyntingVector_RealPoynting
1. Select: PoyntingPoyntingPoyntingPoynting
3. Poynting Window:
2. Min: 0.010.010.010.01
3. Max: 2500250025002500
2. Click the Marker/ArrowMarker/ArrowMarker/ArrowMarker/Arrow tab, in the Arrow OptionArrow OptionArrow OptionArrow Option window
1. Type: CylinderCylinderCylinderCylinder
2. Map Size: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
3. Arrow Tale: UncheckedUncheckedUncheckedUnchecked
4. If real time modereal time modereal time modereal time mode is not checked, click the ApplyApplyApplyApply button.

Training Manual
8.2-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.2-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create ZCreate ZCreate ZCreate Z----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot –––– Time Domain Response (TDR)Time Domain Response (TDR)Time Domain Response (TDR)Time Domain Response (TDR)
2. Context Window:
2. Domain: TimeTimeTimeTime
3. Click TDR OptionsTDR OptionsTDR OptionsTDR Options, OptionsOptionsOptionsOptions Window appears:
1. Input Signal: Step.Step.Step.Step. Rise time: 1ns1ns1ns1ns
2. Maximum Plot time: 6ns.6ns.6ns.6ns.
3. Delta time: 0.1ns0.1ns0.1ns0.1ns
4. Click OKOKOKOK
4. Trace Window
1. X: TimeTimeTimeTime
2. Category: TerminalTerminalTerminalTerminal TDR ImpedanceTDR ImpedanceTDR ImpedanceTDR Impedance
3. Quantity: TDRZt(Trace_T1)TDRZt(Trace_T1)TDRZt(Trace_T1)TDRZt(Trace_T1)
4. Function: NoneNoneNoneNone
5. Click the New ResultNew ResultNew ResultNew Result button

Training Manual
8.2-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Launching Ansoft Designer
To access Ansoft Designer, click the Microsoft StartStartStartStart button, select ProgramsProgramsProgramsPrograms, select
AnsoftAnsoftAnsoftAnsoft and select the Designer 4Designer 4Designer 4Designer 4 program group. Click Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4Ansoft Designer 4.
To create a new project:To create a new project:To create a new project:To create a new project:
From the ProjectProjectProjectProject menu, select Insert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit DesignInsert Nexxim Circuit Design
Choose Layout Technology Window
Click NoneNoneNoneNone

Training Manual
8.2-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adding an HFSS Design – Segmented Ground Plane Model
To insert an HFSS Design select the menu item Project> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSSProject> Add Model> Add HFSS
Model..Model..Model..Model..
The HFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic LinkHFSS Dynamic Link window will appear
Change Name to: Seg_gplaneSeg_gplaneSeg_gplaneSeg_gplane
File name: Click on the ............ browse button
The OpenOpenOpenOpen window will appear
Browse to the location of hfss_seg_gplane.hfsshfss_seg_gplane.hfsshfss_seg_gplane.hfsshfss_seg_gplane.hfss
Click OpenOpenOpenOpen
Click OKOKOKOK to close the HFSS Dynamic Link window
Browse button

Training Manual
8.2-32
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Placing Components
Place the HFSS model in the schematic
1. Click the ProjectProjectProjectProject tab in the Project ManagerProject ManagerProject ManagerProject Manager
2.2.2.2. Expand DefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitionsDefinitions then expand ModelsModelsModelsModels
3. Select seg_gplaneseg_gplaneseg_gplaneseg_gplane, right click and select Place New ComponentPlace New ComponentPlace New ComponentPlace New Component…………
4. Click NoNoNoNo for Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?Show Common Reference Port?
5.5.5.5. Left mouse click to place on the schematic. To finish hit Esc key.

Training Manual
8.2-33
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Place a Resistor in the schematic
1. In the Components TabComponents TabComponents TabComponents Tab, under ResistorsResistorsResistorsResistors, double click ResistorResistorResistorResistor
2. Click the left mouse button once to place a resistor in the schematic.
3. To end the placement, click the right mouse button and select
FinishFinishFinishFinish. (You can also end the placement by pressing the space bar)
Place a Coaxial Cable in the schematic
1. In the Components TabComponents TabComponents TabComponents Tab, under Ideal DistributedIdeal DistributedIdeal DistributedIdeal Distributed, double click
Transmission Line, Time DelayTransmission Line, Time DelayTransmission Line, Time DelayTransmission Line, Time Delay
2. Click the left mouse button once to place a coaxial cable in the
schematic.
Change the physical length of the coaxial cable
1. Right mouse click the component and then select Properties in the
pull down menu
2. Change the value of TDTDTDTD to 1ns1ns1ns1ns, then hit OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
8.2-34
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Place Piecewise Linear Source
2. Change value of Time2Time2Time2Time2 to 1ns1ns1ns1ns
3. Change value of Val2Val2Val2Val2 to 1V1V1V1V
4. Press OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
8.2-35
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Adding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect componentsAdding Wiring to connect components
1. Select the menu item DrawDrawDrawDraw ----> Wire> Wire> Wire> Wire
2. Place the cursor (which is now an X) over a node and left mouse click once
3. Drag the mouse to the connection node and left mouse click once.
4. Repeat this procedure until the connections below are made
Adding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground ConnectionsAdding Ground Connections
1. Select the menu item Draw > GroundDraw > GroundDraw > GroundDraw > Ground (alternatively you can select the
toolbar icon)
2. Place a ground connection on the end of the voltage source
Adding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage ProbesAdding Voltage Probes
1. In the ComponentsComponentsComponentsComponents tab, expand the Probes.Probes.Probes.Probes.
2. Place 2 Voltage ProbesVoltage ProbesVoltage ProbesVoltage Probes as shown below and name them v1, v2.

Training Manual
8.2-36
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item File > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save AsFile > Save As.
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: seg_gplane_transientseg_gplane_transientseg_gplane_transientseg_gplane_transient
Analysis Setup
1. Select the menu item Nexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > TransientNexxim Circuit > Add Solution Setup > Transient
2. Analysis Setup Window:
1.1.1.1. Analysis ControlAnalysis ControlAnalysis ControlAnalysis Control
1. Step: .1ns.1ns.1ns.1ns
2. Stop: 7ns7ns7ns7ns
2. Click OKOKOKOK
3. Select the menu item Nexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > AnalyzeNexxim Circuit > Analyze

Training Manual
8.2-37
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Plot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveformsPlot Input, Output and Difference waveforms
Create ReportCreate ReportCreate ReportCreate Report
2. Quantity: V(V1), V(V2)V(V1), V(V2)V(V1), V(V2)V(V1), V(V2)

Training Manual
8.2-38
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Plot TDRPlot TDRPlot TDRPlot TDR
2. Click on Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables button to create TDR equation
1. Name: type TDRTDRTDRTDR
2. Expression: V(V2)/(V(V1)V(V2)/(V(V1)V(V2)/(V(V1)V(V2)/(V(V1)----V(V2))*50V(V2))*50V(V2))*50V(V2))*50
Note:Note:Note:Note: To create the above expression, follow these steps:
2. Quantity: V(V2)V(V2)V(V2)V(V2)
3. Click Insert Quantity into ExpressionInsert Quantity into ExpressionInsert Quantity into ExpressionInsert Quantity into Expression button
4. Type //// then type ((((
7. Type ----
10. Type ))))
11. Type * 50* 50* 50* 50
Traces Window::::
Category: Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables
Quantity: TDRTDRTDRTDR
Function: <none><none><none><none>
Click the Add TraceAdd TraceAdd TraceAdd Trace button
Click the New ReportNew ReportNew ReportNew Report button (see next page for TDR plot)

Training Manual
8.2-39
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.3-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Non-Ideal Planes
Non-Ideal Ground Plane
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and analyze non-
ideal ground planes using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.
Ground:Ground:Ground:Ground:
Thickness = 0.1 mmThickness = 0.1 mmThickness = 0.1 mmThickness = 0.1 mm
Board:Board:Board:Board:
εεεεrrrr = 1= 1= 1= 1
Trace:Trace:Trace:Trace:
Length = 10 mmLength = 10 mmLength = 10 mmLength = 10 mm
Width = 1 mmWidth = 1 mmWidth = 1 mmWidth = 1 mm
Via:Via:Via:Via:
Diameter = 1 mmDiameter = 1 mmDiameter = 1 mmDiameter = 1 mm
Height = 0.9 mmHeight = 0.9 mmHeight = 0.9 mmHeight = 0.9 mm
bot_gndbot_gndbot_gndbot_gnd
top_gndtop_gndtop_gndtop_gnd
trace1trace1trace1trace1
ViaViaViaVia
trace2trace2trace2trace2

Training Manual
8.3-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
3D Solid Modeling
Primitives: Box, Rectangles, CylindersBox, Rectangles, CylindersBox, Rectangles, CylindersBox, Rectangles, Cylinders
Boolean Operations: Subtract, Unite, DuplicateSubtract, Unite, DuplicateSubtract, Unite, DuplicateSubtract, Unite, Duplicate
Boundary
Boundary Conditions: Perfect H/NaturalPerfect H/NaturalPerfect H/NaturalPerfect H/Natural
Excitations
Ports: Lumped Gap Source PortLumped Gap Source PortLumped Gap Source PortLumped Gap Source Port
Analysis
Results
Fields
Fast Frequency Sweep/Field PlotsFast Frequency Sweep/Field PlotsFast Frequency Sweep/Field PlotsFast Frequency Sweep/Field Plots

Training Manual
8.3-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Design Review
Port Size/Type= ???
Free Space= ???
Port Size/Type
Since the trace is internal to the model, lets use a lumped gap source port
Trace Thickness/Material Properties
To start with perfect conductor, lets make an engineering assumption that the
trace conductivity will not have an impact on the performance of the device.
This will speed up the simulation.
Free Space
Since we are only interested in the modes that occur between the ground
planes, we can use a Perfect H or open boundary condition. We should
expect to get the same answer using an Open(Perfect H) or
matched(Radiation) boundary. The radiation boundary takes longer to solve
since it requires a complex solve.
You do need to use some caution when using Perfect H boundary
conditions in place of radiation boundaries. The Perfect H and
Symmetry Perfect H are mathematically equivalent. Therefore if you
are simulating a subsection of a larger geometry, you have the
potential to create modes that are the result of the boundary condition
or non-physical. In our example, the Perfect H is applied to the outside
of the model and not along any symmetry planes.
It should be noted that the Perfect H boundary condition can be used
with the Driven and Eigenmode solver. The Radiation boundary is
only supported by the Driven Solution.

Training Manual
8.3-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started

Training Manual
8.3-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.3-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:

Training Manual
8.3-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
rectangle:
3. Press OKOKOKOK
Create Via PadCreate Via PadCreate Via PadCreate Via Pad
To create the via pad:To create the via pad:To create the via pad:To create the via pad:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0, Press EnterEnterEnterEnter key
dX: 0.750.750.750.75, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0, Press EnterEnterEnterEnter
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.10.10.10.1, Press EnterEnterEnterEnter
1. Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window.
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Via_padVia_padVia_padVia_pad
3. Press OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
8.3-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Group the Trace & Via PadGroup the Trace & Via PadGroup the Trace & Via PadGroup the Trace & Via Pad
To draw the ground:To draw the ground:To draw the ground:To draw the ground:
rectangle:
To set the AttributeTo set the AttributeTo set the AttributeTo set the Attribute
3. Set TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent level to 0.70.70.70.7
4. Press OKOKOKOK
To fit the viewTo fit the viewTo fit the viewTo fit the view:

Training Manual
8.3-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create AntiCreate AntiCreate AntiCreate Anti----PadPadPadPad
To create the antiTo create the antiTo create the antiTo create the anti----pad:pad:pad:pad:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: AntipadAntipadAntipadAntipad
3. Press OKOKOKOK
Select Ground & Antipad:Select Ground & Antipad:Select Ground & Antipad:Select Ground & Antipad:
1. Select the objects named: GroundGroundGroundGround , AntipadAntipadAntipadAntipad
To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:To complete the ground object:
2. Subtract Window
Tool Parts: AntipadAntipadAntipadAntipad

Training Manual
8.3-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZModeler > Grid Plane > XZ

Training Manual
8.3-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
rectangle:
To zoom inTo zoom inTo zoom inTo zoom in

Training Manual
8.3-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Conducting Object: Via_pad (or Trace)Via_pad (or Trace)Via_pad (or Trace)Via_pad (or Trace)
3. Reference Conductors: GroundGroundGroundGround
4. Click OKOKOKOK
3. Change the NameNameNameName in the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: p1p1p1p1

Training Manual
8.3-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Duplicate ObjectsDuplicate ObjectsDuplicate ObjectsDuplicate Objects
To duplicate the existing objects:To duplicate the existing objects:To duplicate the existing objects:To duplicate the existing objects:
1. Axis: XXXX
2. Angle: 180180180180

Training Manual
8.3-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Select the menu item Modeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XYModeler > Grid Plane > XY
Create ViaCreate ViaCreate ViaCreate Via
To create the via:To create the via:To create the via:To create the via:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: ViaViaViaVia

Training Manual
8.3-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Ground ViaCreate Ground ViaCreate Ground ViaCreate Ground Via
To create the Ground Via:To create the Ground Via:To create the Ground Via:To create the Ground Via:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Via_GNDVia_GNDVia_GNDVia_GND

Training Manual
8.3-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create BoardCreate BoardCreate BoardCreate Board
To create the board:To create the board:To create the board:To create the board:
rectangle:
To set the Attribute:To set the Attribute:To set the Attribute:To set the Attribute:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: BoardBoardBoardBoard
3. Set TransparentTransparentTransparentTransparent to 0.80.80.80.8
4. Press the OKOKOKOK
rectangle:
3.3.3.3. Display WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay WireframeDisplay Wireframe CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked

Training Manual
8.3-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign Perfect H/Natural BoundariesAssign Perfect H/Natural BoundariesAssign Perfect H/Natural BoundariesAssign Perfect H/Natural Boundaries
To assign Perfect H BoundaryTo assign Perfect H BoundaryTo assign Perfect H BoundaryTo assign Perfect H Boundary
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Perfect HHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Perfect HHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Perfect HHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Perfect H…………

Training Manual
8.3-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Order of Basis function: Zero OrderZero OrderZero OrderZero Order
Count: 991: 991: 991: 991

Training Manual
8.3-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_nonidealgndhfss_nonidealgndhfss_nonidealgndhfss_nonidealgnd
Analyze
Manager.
1. Click

Training Manual
8.3-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.3-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
2. Context Window:
Solution: Setup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePass
3. Trace Window
3. Quantity: St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St((Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00
Pass
-12.00
-10.00
-8.00
-6.00
-4.00
-2.00
0.00
Y1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1XY Plot 1 Curve Info
dB(St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1))
Setup1 : AdaptivePass
Freq='10GHz'
Freq='10GHz'

Training Manual
8.3-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
CreateCreateCreateCreate TerminalTerminalTerminalTerminal S Plot vs FrequencyS Plot vs FrequencyS Plot vs FrequencyS Plot vs Frequency
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
2. Quantity: St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)St(Trace_T1,Trace_T1), St(Trace_T1,Trace_T2)
To add data marker to the PlotsTo add data marker to the PlotsTo add data marker to the PlotsTo add data marker to the Plots
1. Select the menu item Report2D > Marker > Add MarkerReport2D > Marker > Add MarkerReport2D > Marker > Add MarkerReport2D > Marker > Add Marker
2. Move cursor to the resonant points on the plotting curve and click the left
mouse button
3. When you are finished placing markers at the resonances, Press ESCESCESCESC Or
right-click the mouse and select Exit Marker ModeExit Marker ModeExit Marker ModeExit Marker Mode.
0.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
Freq [GHz]
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y1
m1
m2
m3
m4 m5
m6
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Name X Y
m1 1.7700 -40.0894
m2 4.2900 -36.3371
m3 5.2500 -49.4293
m4 7.1200 -45.5499
m5 7.5100 -46.0011
m6 8.0900 -21.9133

Training Manual
8.3-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Field Overlays
Select the Relative CS XY PlaneSelect the Relative CS XY PlaneSelect the Relative CS XY PlaneSelect the Relative CS XY Plane
1. Using the Model Tree, expand PlanesPlanesPlanesPlanes
1. Select Relative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XY
Note:Note:Note:Note: Relative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XYRelative CS3 XY plane is the plane between the two Ground
planes.
2. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_EHFSS > Fields > Plot Fields > E > Mag_E
1. Solution: Setup1 : Sweep1Setup1 : Sweep1Setup1 : Sweep1Setup1 : Sweep1
2. Intrinsic Variables: Freq: 1.9GHz; Phase: 0degFreq: 1.9GHz; Phase: 0degFreq: 1.9GHz; Phase: 0degFreq: 1.9GHz; Phase: 0deg
4. In Volume: BoardBoardBoardBoard
3. E-Field Window:
2. Min: 5555
3. Max: 3500350035003500
2. Click the PlotsPlotsPlotsPlots Tab
1. Scalar Plot: FringeFringeFringeFringe

Training Manual
8.3-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Field OverlayCreate Field OverlayCreate Field OverlayCreate Field Overlay –––– Additional Frequency PointsAdditional Frequency PointsAdditional Frequency PointsAdditional Frequency Points
To modify the Frequency of a field plot:To modify the Frequency of a field plot:To modify the Frequency of a field plot:To modify the Frequency of a field plot:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Fields > Modify PlotHFSS > Fields > Modify PlotHFSS > Fields > Modify PlotHFSS > Fields > Modify Plot
2. Select Field Plot Window:
1. Select: Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1Mag_E1
3. Modify Field Plot Window
1. Intrinsic Variables: FreqFreqFreqFreq: 7.1 GHz7.1 GHz7.1 GHz7.1 GHz

Training Manual
8.4-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – Return Path
Return Path
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and analyze the
return path examples used in the Boundary/Excitations Overview for the Ansoft
HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
8.4-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started

Training Manual
8.4-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.4-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:

Training Manual
8.4-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create ConductorCreate ConductorCreate ConductorCreate Conductor
To create the conductor:To create the conductor:To create the conductor:To create the conductor:
1. Select the menu item Draw > LineDraw > LineDraw > LineDraw > Line
7. Click the OKOKOKOK button when the Properties dialog appears
To create conductor profile:To create conductor profile:To create conductor profile:To create conductor profile:
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the base rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: CondCondCondCond
To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:
3. Click the OKOKOKOK button when the Sweep along path dialog appears
Or click the icon on the toolbar

Training Manual
8.4-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Duplicate ConductorDuplicate ConductorDuplicate ConductorDuplicate Conductor
To select the object:To select the object:To select the object:To select the object:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible....
To duplicate the conductor:To duplicate the conductor:To duplicate the conductor:To duplicate the conductor:
1. Select the menu item, Edit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along LineEdit > Duplicate > Along Line.
1. Click CloseCloseCloseClose in Measure Data Window
2. First Point: X: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Y: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0,: 0.0, Z: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Second Point: dX: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0, dY: 0.24: 0.24: 0.24: 0.24, dZ: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0: 0.0 Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
6. Click OKOKOKOK to exit from property window
Mirror ConductorMirror ConductorMirror ConductorMirror Conductor
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible....

Training Manual
8.4-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
rectangle:
dX: 4.04.04.04.0, dY: 2.02.02.02.0, dZ: -0.020.020.020.02, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: GNDGNDGNDGND
Mirror GroundMirror GroundMirror GroundMirror Ground
To select the object GND:To select the object GND:To select the object GND:To select the object GND:
1. Select the objects named: GNDGNDGNDGND
To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:

Training Manual
8.4-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item 3D Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ3D Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ3D Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ3D Modeler > Grid Plane > YZ
X: 5.05.05.05.0, Y: -0.060.060.060.06, Z: 0.10.10.10.1, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
rectangle:

Training Manual
8.4-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. Conducting Object: CondCondCondCond
3. Reference Conductors: GND_1GND_1GND_1GND_1
4. Click OKOKOKOK
3. The PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: NameNameNameName : p1p1p1p1

Training Manual
8.4-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Source2Create Source2Create Source2Create Source2
To select Source:To select Source:To select Source:To select Source:
To mirror the source:To mirror the source:To mirror the source:To mirror the source:
Create Source3Create Source3Create Source3Create Source3
To select Source:To select Source:To select Source:To select Source:
1. Select the objects named: Source_1Source_1Source_1Source_1
To mirror the source:To mirror the source:To mirror the source:To mirror the source:

Training Manual
8.4-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign Excitation (Cont.)Assign Excitation (Cont.)Assign Excitation (Cont.)Assign Excitation (Cont.)
Note:Note:Note:Note: Although ports have been duplicated, terminals need to be assigned using
“Auto Assign Terminals”
Auto Assign Terminals for Port 2Auto Assign Terminals for Port 2Auto Assign Terminals for Port 2Auto Assign Terminals for Port 2
1. Select p2p2p2p2 from the project managerproject managerproject managerproject manager window.
2. Right click p2. Choose Auto assign TerminalsAuto assign TerminalsAuto assign TerminalsAuto assign Terminals
4. Reference Conductors: GNDGNDGNDGND
5. Click OKOKOKOK
Auto Assign Terminals for Port 3Auto Assign Terminals for Port 3Auto Assign Terminals for Port 3Auto Assign Terminals for Port 3
1. Select p3p3p3p3 from the project managerproject managerproject managerproject manager window.
2. Right click p3. Choose Auto assign TerminalsAuto assign TerminalsAuto assign TerminalsAuto assign Terminals
4. Reference Conductors: GNDGNDGNDGND
5. Click OKOKOKOK

Training Manual
8.4-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Material Name: My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4My_FR4

Training Manual
8.4-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the menu item 3D Modeler > Grid Plane > XY3D Modeler > Grid Plane > XY3D Modeler > Grid Plane > XY3D Modeler > Grid Plane > XY
To create substrate:To create substrate:To create substrate:To create substrate:
X: ----5.05.05.05.0, Y: ----1.01.01.01.0, Z: 0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the opposite corner of the base rectangle:
1. Move the slide bar to 0.80.80.80.8 (Opaque=0, Transparency=1)
Mirror SubstrateMirror SubstrateMirror SubstrateMirror Substrate
To select the object substrate:To select the object substrate:To select the object substrate:To select the object substrate:
1. Select the objects named: SubstrateSubstrateSubstrateSubstrate
To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:To mirror the ground:
X: 0.00.00.00.0, Y: 0.00.00.00.0, Z: 0.00.00.00.0, Press EnterEnterEnterEnter
dX: 1.01.01.01.0, dY: 0.00.00.00.0, dZ: 0.00.00.00.0,

Training Manual
8.4-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
rectangle:
1. Move the slide bar to 1111 (Opaque=0, Transparency=1)
Assign RadiationAssign RadiationAssign RadiationAssign Radiation
To assign Radiation BoundaryTo assign Radiation BoundaryTo assign Radiation BoundaryTo assign Radiation Boundary
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Boundaries> Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > RadiationHFSS > Boundaries> Assign > Radiation

Training Manual
8.4-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.4-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.030.030.030.03
Lambda Target:::: Use Default Value: CheckedCheckedCheckedChecked
Order of Basis function: Zero-Order
Count: 301: 301: 301: 301

Training Manual
8.4-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpath
Analyze
Manager.

Training Manual
8.4-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
8.4-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
2. Context Window:
Solution: Setup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePassSetup1: AdaptivePass
3. Trace Window
3. Quantity: St(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) and
St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00
Pass
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y1
Curve Info
dB(St(Cond_T1,Cond_T1))
Freq='15.1GHz'
Freq='15.1GHz'
Freq='15.1GHz'

Training Manual
8.4-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00
Freq [GHz]
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y1
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Create TerminalCreate TerminalCreate TerminalCreate Terminal SSSS----Parameter Plot vs FrequencyParameter Plot vs FrequencyParameter Plot vs FrequencyParameter Plot vs Frequency
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
2. Quantity: St(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) andSt(Cond_T1, Cond_T1) , St(Cond_T1, Cond_T2) and
St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)St(Cond_T1, Cond_T3)

Training Manual
8.4-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Return Path – Add a DC Return Path
We will continue our investigation by adding a connection between the two
ground planes. The DC return path will be the path of least resistance.
DCDCDCDC

Training Manual
8.4-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Copy the DesignCopy the DesignCopy the DesignCopy the Design
To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:
1. Using the project manager,
1. Right-click on HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1, and choose CopyCopyCopyCopy
1. Right-click on hfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpath, and choose PastePastePastePaste
Open the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model Editor
To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:
1. Right-click on HFSSDesign2HFSSDesign2HFSSDesign2HFSSDesign2
and choose 3D Model Editor3D Model Editor3D Model Editor3D Model Editor
Choose pecpecpecpec in Materials toolbar

Training Manual
8.4-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create DC PathCreate DC PathCreate DC PathCreate DC Path
To create the DC path:To create the DC path:To create the DC path:To create the DC path:
rectangle:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: DCPathDCPathDCPathDCPath

Training Manual
8.4-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > SaveFile > SaveFile > SaveFile > Save
Analyze
To Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing Report
To open all reports:To open all reports:To open all reports:To open all reports:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All Reports
0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00
Freq [GHz]
-45.00
-40.00
-35.00
-30.00
-25.00
-20.00
-15.00
-10.00
-5.00
0.00
Y1
Curve Info
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1
Setup1 : Sweep1

Training Manual
8.4-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Return Path – Add a RF Return Path
We will continue our investigation by adding an RF return path between the two
ground planes. The RF return path will be the path of least inductance.
Copy the DesignCopy the DesignCopy the DesignCopy the Design
To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:To copy the entire design:
1. Right-click on HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1HFSSDesign1, and choose CopyCopyCopyCopy
1. Right-click on hfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpathhfss_returnpath, and choose PastePastePastePaste
Open the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model EditorOpen the 3D Model Editor
To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:To open the 3D Model Editor:
Click on HFSSDesign3HFSSDesign3HFSSDesign3HFSSDesign3 in the project manager
1. Using the 3D Modeler Materials toolbar, choose pecpecpecpec
RF Return PathRF Return PathRF Return PathRF Return Path

Training Manual
8.4-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create RF PathCreate RF PathCreate RF PathCreate RF Path
To create the RF path:To create the RF path:To create the RF path:To create the RF path:
1. Select the menu item Draw > LineDraw > LineDraw > LineDraw > Line
3. Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the radial point:
To create the profile:To create the profile:To create the profile:To create the profile:
rectangle:
dX: 0.00.00.00.0, dY: 0.120.120.120.12, dZ: -0.020.020.020.02, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: RFPathRFPathRFPathRFPath
To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:To Sweep the profile:
1. Select the objects named: Polyline2, RFPathPolyline2, RFPathPolyline2, RFPathPolyline2, RFPath
4. Click the OKOKOKOK button when the Sweep along path dialog appears

Training Manual
8.4-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Mirror ConductorMirror ConductorMirror ConductorMirror Conductor
1. Select the objects named: RFPathRFPathRFPathRFPath
1. Select the objects named: RFPath, RFPath_1RFPath, RFPath_1RFPath, RFPath_1RFPath, RFPath_1
3. Select the menu item, 3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite3D Modeler > Boolean > Unite

Training Manual
8.4-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. In an Ansoft HFSS window, select the menu item File > SaveFile > SaveFile > SaveFile > Save
Analyze
To Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing ReportTo Open All Existing Report
To open all reports:To open all reports:To open all reports:To open all reports:
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All ReportsHFSS > Results > Open All Reports
0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00
Freq[GHz]
-60.00
-50.00
-40.00
-30.00
-20.00
-10.00
0.00
Y1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign4XYPlot 2
CurveInfo
Setup1: Sweep1
Setup1: Sweep1
Setup1: Sweep1

Training Manual
9.1-1
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Example – On-Chip Spiral Inductor
OnOnOnOn----Chip Passive ExampleChip Passive ExampleChip Passive ExampleChip Passive Example
This example is intended to show you how to create, simulate, and analyze a 2.5
turn spiral inductor using the Ansoft HFSS Design Environment.

Training Manual
9.1-2
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Getting Started

Training Manual
9.1-3
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-4
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Set Model Units:
1. Select Units: umumumum
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_SubMy_SubMy_SubMy_Sub
3. For the ValueValueValueValue of Bulk ConductivityBulk ConductivityBulk ConductivityBulk Conductivity type: 10101010

Training Manual
9.1-5
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
1. Select the AttributeAttributeAttributeAttribute tab from the PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties windows
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: SubSubSubSub
To fit the viewTo fit the viewTo fit the viewTo fit the view
Set the default material:Set the default material:Set the default material:Set the default material:
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_OxideMy_OxideMy_OxideMy_Oxide

Training Manual
9.1-6
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create OxideCreate OxideCreate OxideCreate Oxide
To create the oxide layer:To create the oxide layer:To create the oxide layer:To create the oxide layer:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: OxideOxideOxideOxide
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_PassMy_PassMy_PassMy_Pass

Training Manual
9.1-7
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create PassivationCreate PassivationCreate PassivationCreate Passivation
To create the passivation layer:To create the passivation layer:To create the passivation layer:To create the passivation layer:
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: PassPassPassPass
1. Using the Modeler Materials toolbar, choose vacuumvacuumvacuumvacuum
Create Air BoxCreate Air BoxCreate Air BoxCreate Air Box
To create the airbox:To create the airbox:To create the airbox:To create the airbox:

Training Manual
9.1-8
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. Select Object Dialog
Select the Object named: AirAirAirAir
To create a radiation Boundary:To create a radiation Boundary:To create a radiation Boundary:To create a radiation Boundary:
2. Radiation Boundary Window
1.Select the menu item Draw > RectangularDraw > RectangularDraw > RectangularDraw > Rectangular

Training Manual
9.1-9
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
To select the groundTo select the groundTo select the groundTo select the ground
1. Select the object named: GroundGroundGroundGround
Hide DielectricsHide DielectricsHide DielectricsHide Dielectrics
To hide the dielectrics:To hide the dielectrics:To hide the dielectrics:To hide the dielectrics:
1. Select the menu item Edit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All VisibleEdit > Select All Visible
2. Select the menu item View > Hide Selection > All ViewsView > Hide Selection > All ViewsView > Hide Selection > All ViewsView > Hide Selection > All Views
1. For the Material NameMaterial NameMaterial NameMaterial Name type: My_MetMy_MetMy_MetMy_Met
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of Bulk ConductivityBulk ConductivityBulk ConductivityBulk Conductivity type: 2.8e72.8e72.8e72.8e7
Select the menu item Modeler > Coordinate Systems > Create > Relative CS >Modeler > Coordinate Systems > Create > Relative CS >Modeler > Coordinate Systems > Create > Relative CS >Modeler > Coordinate Systems > Create > Relative CS >
OffsetOffsetOffsetOffset
Using the coordinate entry fields, enter the origin
1.1.1.1. X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 304.8,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 304.8,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 304.8,X: 0.0, Y: 0.0, Z: 304.8, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter key

Training Manual
9.1-10
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-11
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-12
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-13
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-14
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-15
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-16
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-17
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-18
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Source 1Create Source 1Create Source 1Create Source 1
1.1.1.1. X: 142.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 142.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 142.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 142.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter Key
rectangle
1.1.1.1. dX:dX:dX:dX: ----15.0, dY:15.0, dY:15.0, dY:15.0, dY: ----15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter Key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Source1Source1Source1Source1
1. Select the object named: Source1Source1Source1Source1
Note:Note:Note:Note: You can also select the object fom the Model Tree
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port, a
window appears, highlight RingRingRingRing and click Add ==>>Add ==>>Add ==>>Add ==>>, then click OKOKOKOK. The
lumped port and terminal are automatically assigned.

Training Manual
9.1-19
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)
3. Change the namenamenamename in the
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: p1p1p1p1
Set the name for the pinSet the name for the pinSet the name for the pinSet the name for the pin
2. Expand p1p1p1p1, highlight Source1_T1Source1_T1Source1_T1Source1_T1
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: 1111

Training Manual
9.1-20
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Source 2Create Source 2Create Source 2Create Source 2
1.1.1.1. X: 131.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 131.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 131.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0,X: 131.0, Y: 7.5, Z: 1.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter Key
rectangle
1.1.1.1. dX: 15.0, dY:dX: 15.0, dY:dX: 15.0, dY:dX: 15.0, dY: ----15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0,15.0, dZ: 0.0, Press the EnterEnterEnterEnter Key
2. For the ValueValueValueValue of NameNameNameName type: Source2Source2Source2Source2
1. Select the object named: Source2Source2Source2Source2
Note:Note:Note:Note: You can also select the object fom the Model Tree
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port,HFSS > Excitations > Assign > Lumped Port, a
window appears, and click OKOKOKOK. The lumped port and terminal are
automatically assigned.

Training Manual
9.1-21
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)Assign Excitation (Continued)
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: p2p2p2p2
Set the name for the pinSet the name for the pinSet the name for the pinSet the name for the pin
2. Expand p1p1p1p1, highlight Source1_T2Source1_T2Source1_T2Source1_T2
PropertiesPropertiesPropertiesProperties window: 2222

Training Manual
9.1-22
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Show AllShow AllShow AllShow All
To Show all objectsTo Show all objectsTo Show all objectsTo Show all objects
1. Select the menu item View > Show All > All ViewsView > Show All > All ViewsView > Show All > All ViewsView > Show All > All Views
boundary.

Training Manual
9.1-23
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Analysis Setup
Maximum Delta S: 0.020.020.020.02
Order of bases function: Zero order.: Zero order.: Zero order.: Zero order.
2. Frequency Setup:
Error Tolerance: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%: 0.5%

Training Manual
9.1-24
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
2. From the Save AsSave AsSave AsSave As window, type the Filename: hfss_spiral_inductorhfss_spiral_inductorhfss_spiral_inductorhfss_spiral_inductor
Analyze
Note:Note:Note:Note: To view any errors or warning messages, see the Message
Manager.
1. Select the menu item HFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze AllHFSS > Analyze All Or click the icon
on the tool bar.

Training Manual
9.1-25
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-26
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
Create Reports
Create Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair SCreate Differential Pair S----Parameter PlotParameter PlotParameter PlotParameter Plot
2. Context Window:
3. Trace Window
2. Quantity: St(1,1), St(2,1)St(1,1), St(2,1)St(1,1), St(2,1)St(1,1), St(2,1)

Training Manual
9.1-27
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00
Freq [GHz]
0.00
1.00
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
6.00
7.00
8.00
9.00
Y1
Ansoft Corporation HFSSDesign1Q Plot
Curve Info
abs(Q11)
Setup1 : Sweep1
abs(Q22)
Setup1 : Sweep1
Custom EquationsCustom EquationsCustom EquationsCustom Equations –––– Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables
Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >
Trace Window
1.1.1.1. Click the Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables button
2. Output Variables dialog
1. Name: Q11Q11Q11Q11
2. Expression:
1. Category: Terminal Y ParametersTerminal Y ParametersTerminal Y ParametersTerminal Y Parameters
2. Quantity: Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1)
4. Click the Insert into ExpressionInsert into ExpressionInsert into ExpressionInsert into Expression button
5. Type: ////
7. Function: rererere
4. Repeat for Q22Q22Q22Q22, by replacing Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1)Yt(1,1) with Yt(2,2)Yt(2,2)Yt(2,2)Yt(2,2)
5. Click YYYY tab
Quantity: Q11, Q22Q11, Q22Q11, Q22Q11, Q22
Function: absabsabsabs

Training Manual
9.1-28
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704
( ) ( )( )22
1,1(Yt1,1(Yt***2/())1,1(Yt(11 imrefpiimL +−=
10.1-
28
Create Reports (Continued)
Custom EquationsCustom EquationsCustom EquationsCustom Equations –––– Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables
Select the menu item HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >HFSS > Results > Create Terminal Solution Data Report >
Trace Window
1.1.1.1. Click the Output VariablesOutput VariablesOutput VariablesOutput Variables button
2. Output Variables dialog
1. Name: L11L11L11L11
2. Expression:
5. Type: *(----1)/(2*pi*freq*(1)/(2*pi*freq*(1)/(2*pi*freq*(1)/(2*pi*freq*(
10. Type: )*)*)*)*
15. Type: )+)+)+)+
20. Type: )*)*)*)*
25. Type: ))))))))
5. Click YYYY tab
Quantity: L11L11L11L11
Function: nonenonenonenone

Training Manual
9.1-29
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-30
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Training Manual
9.1-31
February 20, 2009
Inventory #002704

Hfss user guide

More Related Content

What's hot

Similar to Hfss user guide

Recently uploaded

Hfss user guide